Foreword

Welcome to the growing group of value- conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering and
quality construction of each vehicle we build.
This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupants
follow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble- free motoring. For
important information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.
When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your complete
satisfaction. Your Toyota dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.
If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, please call the following number:
U.S. OWNERS: D When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:
Toyota Customer Experience Center Toll- free:1- 800- 331- 4331
D Hawaii:
Servco Automotive Customer Services Toll- free:1- 888- 272- 5515
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.
All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy of
continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may
find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
Please access our websites for further information.
D The U.S. mainland www.toyota.com
D Hawaii www.toyotahawaii.com

 2005 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION

All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of Toyota
Motor Corporation.
2006 L/C100 from Dec.’04 Prod (OM60B63U) i
 Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings Safety symbol

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam-
age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully to
avoid possible injury or damage.
The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they are
used in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may
cause injury to people if the warning is ignored.
You are informed about what you must or must not
do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself
and others.
When you see the safety symbol
shown above, it means: “Do not”; “Do
NOTICE not do this”; or “Do not let this hap-
pen”.
This is a warning against anything which may
cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the
warning is ignored. You are informed about what
you must or must not do in order to avoid or re-
duce the risk of damage to your vehicle and its
equipment.

ii
 Important information about your Toyota

Occupant restraint systems The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to help
reduce the possibility of death or serious injury in the
Toyota encourages you and your family to take the time event of a collision. None of these systems, either indi-
to read Section 1- 3 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. In vidually or together, can ensure that there is no injury
terms of helping you understand how you can receive in the event of collision. However, the more you know
the maximum benefit of the occupant restraint systems about these systems and how to use them properly, the
this vehicle provides, Section 1- 3 of this Owner’s Manu- greater your chances become of surviving an accident
al is the most important section for you and your family without death or serious injury.
to read. Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants
Section 1- 3 describes the function and operation con- of the vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should
cerning seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child re- wear seat belts properly at all times. Children should
straint systems of this vehicle and some potential haz- always be secured in child restraint systems that are
ards you should be aware of. These systems work to- appropriate for their age and size. SRS (Supplemental
gether along with the overall structure of this vehicle in Restraint System) airbags are, as their names imply,
order to provide occupant restraint in the event of a designed to work with, and be supplemental to, seat
crash. The effect of each system is enhanced when it is belts and are not substitutes for them. SRS airbags can
us ed p r oper l y a nd t oget her w i t h o t her s y s t ems . N o be very effective in reducing the risk of head and chest
single occupant restraint system can, by itself, provide injuries by preventing contact of the head and chest
y ou o r y our f ami l y w i t h t he e qual l ev el o f r es t r ai nt with interior portions of the vehicle.
which these systems can provide when used together.
That is why it is important for you and your family to
understand the purpose and proper use of each of these
systems and how they relate to each other.

iii
In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy Event data recorder
with tremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the
SRS airbags makes the SRS airbags themselves poten- Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control
tial sources of serious injury if an occupant is too close certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist
to an airbag, or if an object or some part of his or her in driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance.
body has been placed between the occupant and the Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is
airbag at the time of deployment. This is just one exam- a system to record data in a crash or a near car crash
ple of how the instructions in Section 1- 3 of this Own- event. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
er’s Manual will help ensure proper use of the occupant
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In
restraint systems, and increase the safety they can pro-
a crash or a near car crash event, this device may
vide to you and your family in the event of an accident.
record some or all of the following information:
Toyota recommends you to read the provisions in Sec-
D Engine speed
tion 1- 3 carefully and refer to them as needed during
D Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
your time of ownership of this vehicle.
D Vehicle speed
D To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
D Position of the transmission selector lever
D Whether the driver and front passenger wore the
seat belts or not
D Driver’s seat position
D Front passenger’s occupant classification

iv
 D SRS airbag deployment data Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to
D SRS airbag system diagnostic data a third party except when:
If your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability con- D An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leas-
trol (VSC) system, its Electronic Control Unit (ECU) may ing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained
contain another EDR. There are a variety of driving D Officially requested by the police or other authorities
situations which include activating the VSC under which D Used as a defence for Toyota in a law suit
the VSC EDR will record certain information. The VSC
D Ordered by the court
EDR may record some or all of the following informa-
However, if necessary Toyota will:
tion:
D Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety
D Behavior of the vehicle
performance
D Steering wheel angle
D Disclose the data to a third party for research pur-
D Vehicle speed poses without disclosing details of the vehicle own-
D To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed er, and only when it is deemed necessary
D To what extent the brake pedal was applied D Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identifi-
D To what extent the ECU controlled the condition of cation information to a non- Toyota organization for
the 4 wheels research purposes
D Vehicle stability control system diagnostic data
The information above is intended to be used for the
purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike
general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound
data such as conversation between passengers.

v
 New vehicle warranty Important health and safety
Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota information about your Toyota
limited warranties:
D New vehicle warranty
D Emission control systems warranty
CAUTION
D Others D WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-
For further information, please refer to the “Owner ’s ents, and a wide variety of automobile compo-
nents contain or emit chemicals known to the
Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Sup-
State of California to cause cancer and birth de-
plement”.
fects and other reproductive harm. In addition,
oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well
as waste produced by component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
Your responsibility for maintenance to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro-
ductive harm.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the speci- D Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
fied maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
of these maintenance requirements. Also included in hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
Section 6 is general maintenance. For scheduled mainte- chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
nance information, place refer to the “Scheduled Mainte- animals. Always protect your skin by washing
nance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. thoroughly with soap and water.

vi
 Accessories, spare parts and Installation of a mobile
modification of your Toyota two- way radio system
A wide variety of non- genuine spare parts and accesso- As the installation of a mobile two- way radio system in
ries for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as
market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel
these products and is not responsible for their perfor- injection system, electronic throttle control system,
mance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they cruise control system, anti- lock brake system, active
may c aus e t o, o r a dv er s e e ff ec t t hey m ay h av e o n, traction control system, vehicle stability control system,
your Toyota vehicle. active height control suspension system, skyhook TEMS,
This vehicle should not be modified with non- genuine SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system,
Toyota products. Modification with non- genuine Toyota be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precaution-
products could affect its performance, safety or durabili- ary measures or special instructions regarding installa-
ty, and may even violate governmental regulations. In tion.
addition, damage or performance problems resulting from
the modification may not be covered under warranty.

vii
 Tires and loading on your Toyota Scrapping of your Toyota
Underinflated or overinflated tire inflation pressure The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in
and the excess load may result in the deterioration your Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle
of steering ability and braking ability, leading to is scrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as
an accident. Check the tire inflation pressure peri- they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be
odically and be sure to keep the load limits given sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat
in this Owner’s Manual. For details about tire infla- belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified
tion pressure and load limits, see pages 320 and service shop or by your Toyota dealer before you dis-
246. pose of your vehicle.

viii
 Leak detection pump On- pavement and off- road
This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check.
driving tips
This check is done several hours after the engine is
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class. Utility
turned off. So you may hear sound coming from under-
vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
neath the luggage compartment for several minutes. It
other types of vehicles. This vehicle will handle and
does not indicate a malfunction.
maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car be-
cause it is designed for off- road use also. In addition,
this vehicle has a higher ground clearance and center of
gravity than that of an ordinary passenger car. This
vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be
more likely to rollover. Failure to operate this vehicle
correctly may result in loss of control, accidents or
vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. Be sure
to read “Off- road vehicle precautions” on page 224 and
“Off- road driving precautions” on page 254.

ix
x
 WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU Ċ PLEASE BUCKLE UP

Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.

Toyota belts are:

D Comfortable
D Easy to use
D Convenient
We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

U
 SECTION 1- 1
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Overview of instruments and controls
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Instrument cluster overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Indicator symbols on the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

1
Instrument panel overview
"View A
1. Side vents
2. Side defroster outlets
3. Instrument cluster
4. Center vents
5. Electric moon roof switches and/or
personal lights
6. Tire selector switch (in the glove box)
7. Glove box
8. Power door lock switches
9. Power window switches
10. Automatic transmission selector lever
I11038b 11. Seat heater switches
12. Rear seat audio system
13. Cup holder
14. Parking brake lever
15. Second start mode selector button and
driving pattern selector button
16. Four- wheel drive control lever
17. Active height control suspension and
skyhook TEMS switches
18. Lower vent
19. Hood lock release lever
20. Fuel filler door opener
21. Window lock switch

2
"View B
(Vehicles with navigation system)
1. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
2. Cruise control switch
3. Ignition switch
4. Wiper and washer switches
5. Emergency flasher switch
6. Navigation system including air condi-
tioning controls (See the separate
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)
7. Clock and outside temperature display
8. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder
light
9. Audio system
11C515b 10. Outside rear view mirror heater switch
11. Rear air conditioning switch
12. Rear window defogger switch
13. Center differential lock switch
14. Power antenna switch
15. Power tilt and telescopic steering
switch
16. Instrument panel light control dial
17. Power rear view mirror control switches
18. Tire pressure warning system reset
switch
19. Power quarter window switch
(left- hand side)
20. Power quarter window switch
(right- hand side)
21. Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags
off switch
3
"View B
(Vehicles without navigation system)
1. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
2. Cruise control switch
3. Ignition switch
4. Wiper and washer switches
5. Emergency flasher switch
6. Clock, outside temperature and trip in-
formation display
7. Audio system
8. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder
light
9. Air conditioning controls
11C029d 10. Outside rear view mirror heater switch
11. Rear air conditioning switch
12. Rear window defogger switch
13. Center differential lock switch
14. Power antenna switch
15. Power tilt and telescopic steering
switch
16. Instrument panel light control dial
17. Power rear view mirror control switches
18. Tire pressure warning system reset
switch
19. Power quarter window switch
(left- hand side)
20. Power quarter window switch
(right- hand side)
21. Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags
off switch
4
"Lower part of center cluster panel

1. Ashtray
2. Cigarette lighter
3. Power outlet

5
Instrument cluster overview

11C501b

1. Voltmeter 4. Tachometer 8. Odometer and two trip meters

2. Speedometer 5. Height control indicator light 9. Trip meter reset knob
3. Service reminder indicators and 6. Engine oil pressure gauge 10. Fuel gauge
indicator lights 7. Engine coolant temperature gauge

6
Indicator symbols on the instrument panel

Brake system warning light∗1 Low tire pressure warning light∗1

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1 Unengaged “Park” warning light∗1

Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning

Charging system warning light∗1 light∗1

Engine oil replacement reminder light Turn signal indicator lights

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1 Headlight high beam indicator light

Low fuel level warning light∗1 Driving pattern (“POWER” mode) indicator
light

SRS warning light∗1 Automatic transmission second start indicator

light

Anti- lock brake system warning light∗1 Center differential lock indicator light

Open door warning light∗1 Cruise control indicator light∗2

7
 Automatic transmission indicator lights

Vehicle stability control system off indicator

light∗1

Vehicle stability control system and active

traction control system warning light∗1

Active traction control system indicator light

Slip indicator light

Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator light∗3

∗1 : For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning

buzzers” on page 124.
∗2 : If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 155.
∗3 : For details, see “Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off
switch” on page 68.

8
 SECTION 1- 2
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Keys and Doors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Engine immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Wireless remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Power quarter windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Theft deterrent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Electric moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

9
Keys
A transponder chip for engine immobilizer
system has been placed in the head of
the master and sub keys. These chips are
needed to enable the system to function
correctly, so be careful not to lose these
keys. If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the system
or start the engine.
To protect items locked in the glove box
when using valet parking, leave the sub
key with the attendant.
Since the side doors can be locked with-
out a key, you should always carry a
spare master key in case you accidentally
Your vehicle is supplied with two kinds
lock your keys inside the vehicle. NOTICE
of keys.
1. Master keys (black)—These keys work When using a key containing a trans-
in every lock. Your Toyota dealer will ponder chip, observe the following
need one of them to make a new key precautions:
with a built- in transponder chip. z When starting the engine, do not
These keys are fitted with the wireless use the key with a key ring resting
remote control transmitter. For informa- on the key grip and do not press
tion on use of the wireless remote con- the key ring against the key grip.
trol key, see “Wireless remote control” Otherwise the engine may not start,
on page 13. or may stop soon after it starts.
2. Sub key (gray)—This key does not
work in the glove box.

10
 z Do not use the key with electromag-
netic materials.

z When starting the engine, do not z Do not bend the key grip.
use the key with other transponder z Do not cover the key grip with any
keys around (including keys of oth- material that cuts off electromagnet-
er vehicles) and do not press other ic waves.
key plates against the key grip.
Otherwise the engine may not start, z Do not knock the key hard against
or may stop soon after it starts. If other objects.
this happens, remove the key once z Do not leave the key exposed to
and then insert it again after remov- high temperatures for a long period,
ing other transponder keys (includ- such as on the dashboard and hood
ing keys of other vehicles) from the under direct sunlight.
ring or while gripping or covering z Do not put the key in water or
them with your hand to start the wash it in an ultrasonic washer.
engine.

11
 Engine immobilizer system

KEY NUMBER PLATE The engine immobilizer system is a The system is automatically set when the
Your key number is shown on the plate. theft prevention system. When you in- key is removed from the ignition switch.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as sert the key in the ignition switch, the The indicator light will start flashing to
your wallet, not in the vehicle. transponder chip in the key’s head show the system is set.
transmits an electronic code to the ve- If any of the following indicator conditions
If you should lose your keys or if you hicle. The engine will start only when
need additional keys, duplicates can be occurs, contact your Toyota dealer.
the electronic code in the chip corre-
made by a Toyota dealer using the key sponds to the registered ID code for D The indicator light stays on except
number. the vehicle. when the theft deterrent system is set-
We recommend writing down the key num- ting or activating. (See “Theft deterrent
ber and storing it in a safe place. system” on page 28.)
D The indicator light does not start flash-
ing when the key is removed from the
ignition switch.
D The indicator light flashes inconsistent-
ly.

12
 Wireless remote control*—
Inserting the registered key in the ignition
switch automatically cancels the system, FCC ID: MOZRI- 20BTY
which enables the engine to start. The
This device complies with Part 15 of the
indicator light will go off.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
For your Toyota dealer to make a new key following two conditions:
with a built- in transponder chip, your
dealer will need your key number and
master key. However, there is a limit to
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
12c520
the number of additional keys your Toyota accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause unde-
dealer can make for you.
sired operation.
If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the sys-
tem or start the engine. CAUTION
1. “LOCK” switch
Changes or modifications not ex- 2. Indicator light
pressly approved by the party respon- 3. “PANIC” switch
sible for compliance could void the
4. “UNLOCK” switch
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment. The wireless remote control system is
designed to lock or unlock all the side
doors and back door from a distance
within approximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the
vehicle.
NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated
as vehicle theft deterrent measure in case
of the loss of the wireless remote control
key. Ask your Toyota dealer for details.
When you operate any switch, push it
slowly and securely. At this time, the indi-
cator light flashes once.
13
 —Locking and unlocking
doors
The wireless remote control key is an If you lose your wireless remote control
electronic component. Observe the follow- key, contact your Toyota dealer as soon
ing instructions in order not to cause dam- as possible to avoid the possibility of
age and trouble to the key. theft, or an accident. (For detailed infor-
D Do not leave the key in places where mation, see “If you lose your keys” on
the temperature becomes high such as page 291.)
on the dashboard.
D Do not disassemble it.
D Avoid knocking it hard against other
objects or dropping it.
D Avoid putting it in water.
You can use up to 4 wireless remote con-
trol keys for the same vehicle. Contact Locking operation
your Toyota dealer for detailed information.
If the wireless remote control key does
not actuate the doors or operate from a
normal distance, or the indicator light on
the key is dimmed or does not come on:
D Check for closeness to a radio trans-
mitter such as a radio station or an
airport which can interfere with normal
operation of the key.
D The battery may have been consumed.
Check the battery in the key. To
replace the battery, see following
“—Replacing battery” on page 17.

Unlocking operation

14
 —Activating panic mode
To lock and unlock all the side doors Together with the activation of unlocking,
and back door, push the switches slow- the interior light comes on for 15 seconds
ly and securely. if the interior light switch is in “DOOR”
To lock: Push the “LOCK” switch. All the position.* However, this function does not
side doors and back door are locked si- work when the ignition key is in the “ACC”
multaneously. At this time, turn signal or “ON” position. (For detailed information,
lights flash once.* see “Interior lights” on page 113.)
NOTE: *The turn signal lights can be set You have 30 seconds to open a door after
not to flash. Ask your Toyota dealer for using the wireless remote unlock fea-
details. ture.** If a door is not opened by then, all
the side doors and back door will be auto-
Check to see that all the side doors and
matically locked again.
back door are securely locked.
If any of the side doors or back door is
NOTE: *The interior light can be set not
to come on or the duration of lighting can
not securely closed, or if the key is in the Pushing the “PANIC” switch for 1 sec-
be changed. **The time before automatic
ignition switch, locking cannot be per- re- locking can be changed. Ask your ond blows the horn intermittently and
formed by the “LOCK” switch. Toyota dealer for details. flashes the headlights, tail lights and
To unlock: Push the “UNLOCK” switch If the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch is kept interior lights.*
once to unlock the driver’s door alone. pressed in, the locking or unlocking opera- NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated.
Pushing the switch twice within 3 seconds tion is not repeated. Release the switch Ask your Toyota dealer for details.
unlocks all the side doors and back door and then push again. The “PANIC” switch is used to deter ve-
simultaneously.* At this time, turn signal
hicle theft when you witness anyone at-
lights flash twice.**
tempting to break into or damage your
NOTE: *The 2- step unlocking function can vehicle.
be changed. **The turn signal lights can
be set not to flash. Ask your Toyota deal-
er for details.

15
The alarm will last for 1 minute. To stop
the alarm midway, push the “PANIC”, NOTICE: D Connect the equipment into an outlet
“LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch, or unlock This equipment has been tested and on a circuit different from that to
any side door or back door with key. You found to comply with the limits for a which the receiver is connected.
can also stop the alarm by turning the Class B digital device, pursuant to Part D Consult the dealer or an experienced
ignition key from “LOCK” to the “ON” posi- 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are radio/TV technician for help.
tion. designed to provide reasonable protec-
tion against harmful interference in a FCC WARNING:
The “PANIC” mode does not work when Changes or modifications not ex-
residential installation. This equipment
the ignition key is in the “ON” position. pressly approved by the party respon-
generates, uses and can radiate radio
For vehicles sold in U.S.A. frequency energy and, if not installed sible for compliance could void the
and used in accordance with the instruc- user’s authority to operate the equip-
This device complies with Part 15 of the tions, may cause harmful interference to ment.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the radio communications. However, there is
following two conditions: (1) This device no guarantee that interference will not
may not cause harmful interference, and occur in a particular installation. If this CAUTION
(2) this device must accept any interfer- equipment does cause harmful interfer-
ence received, including interference ence to radio or television reception, Changes or modifications not ex-
that may cause undesired operation. which can be determined by turning the pressly approved by the party respon-
equipment off and on, the user is en- sible for compliance could void the
couraged to try to correct the interfer- user’s authority to operate the equip-
ence by one or more of the following ment.
measures:
D Reorient or relocate the receiving an-
tenna.
D Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.

16
—Replacing battery
For replacement, use a CR2016 lithium
battery or equivalent and a special screw-
driver.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre- 11C522x

vent small children from swallowing
the removed battery or components.

NOTICE
z When replacing the battery, be care-
ful not to lose the components. 1. Remove the screw, and then the cover. 2. Remove the module from the key
z Replace only with the same or frame.
equivalent type recommended by a
Toyota dealer.
z Dispose of used battery according
to the local laws.

Replace the battery by following these

procedures:

17
 Side doors—
4. Replace the battery case cover.
5. Install the module into the key frame
and secure the cover with the screw.
6. When pushing any switch on the wire-
less key, make sure the indicator light
11C523 comes on.

NOTICE
z Make sure the positive side and
negative side of the battery are
faced correctly.
z Do not replace the battery with wet
hands. Water may cause unexpected
3. Open and remove the battery case LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY
rust.
cover using a coin. Remove the dis- Insert the key into the keyhole and turn
charged battery and put in a new bat- z Do not touch or move any compo-
it.
tery with the positive side up. nents inside the transmitter, or it
may interfere with proper operation. To lock: Turn the key forward.
To unlock: Turn the key backward.
z Be careful not to bend the electrode
when inserting the battery and that All the side doors and back door lock and
dust or oils do not adhere to the unlock simultaneously with either front
case. side door. In the driver’s door lock, turn-
ing the key once will unlock the driver’s
z Take care not to lose the screws.
door and twice in succession will unlock
all the side doors and back door simulta-
After replacing the battery, check that the neously.*
key operates properly. If the key still does
not operate properly, contact your Toyota
NOTE: *The 2- step unlocking function can
be changed. Ask your Toyota dealer for
dealer.
details.

18
 LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH
POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Push the switch.
To lock: Push the switch down on the
front side.
To unlock: Push the switch down on the
l12093a
rear side.
All the side doors and back door lock or
unlock simultaneously.
When the front doors are locked from the
outside or locked with the wireless remote
control key, the power door lock switch
Driver’s side will not work until the either front door is
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH unlocked with the key, lock knob, or wire-
INSIDE LOCK KNOB less remote control key.
Move the lock knob.
To lock: Push the knob forward.
To unlock: Pull the knob backward.
The front doors can be opened by pulling
the inside handles even if the lock knob
are in the lock position.
l12046a
Closing the side door with the lock knob
in the lock position will also lock the side
door. Be careful not to lock your keys in
the vehicle.
Front side doors cannot be locked when
either front side door is open and the key
is in the ignition. Passenger’s side

19
 —Automatic door locking and
unlocking functions
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING
CAUTION
You can select the following functions:
Before driving, be sure that the doors D Locking linked with the shift posi-
are closed and locked, especially tion*
when small children are in the ve- All doors are automatically locked when
hicle. Along with the proper use of the selector lever is moved out of “P”
seat belts, locking the doors helps position.
prevent the driver and passengers
from being thrown out from the ve- *:This function is the default setting for
new vehicles.
hicle in an accident. It also helps pre-
vent the doors from being opened D Locking linked with vehicle speed
unintentionally. All doors are automatically locked when
the vehicle speed goes above about 20
REAR DOOR CHILD- PROTECTORS km/h (12 mph).
Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”
position as shown on the label.
When the child- protector is locked, you
cannot open the rear door by the inside
door handle. We recommend using this
feature whenever small children are in the
vehicle.

20
You can set or cancel the automatic To select the locking linked with the AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCKING
door locking functions: vehicle speed: You can select the following functions:
Be sure to apply the parking brake when 1. Close all doors and turn the ignition D Unlocking linked with the ignition
performing the following operations. switch to the “ON” position. switch
To select the locking linked with the 2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the All doors are automatically unlocked
shift position: “N” position. when the the driver’s door is opened
1. Close all doors and turn the ignition 3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni- within 10 seconds after the ignition
switch to the “ON” position. tion switch to the “ON” position, press switch is turned to the “ACC” or
2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” posi- and hold the driver’s side power door “LOCK” position, or the key is re-
tion. lock switch in the lock position for 5 moved.
seconds and then release. D Unlocking linked with the shift posi-
3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni-
tion switch to the “ON” position, press The doors will be locked and unlocked tion
and hold the driver’s side power door to indicate that the function is set. All doors are automatically unlocked
lock switch in the lock position for 5 To cancel the function, do the above op- when the selector lever is moved to
seconds and then release. eration again. “P” position.
The doors will be locked and unlocked
to indicate that the function is set.
To cancel the function, do the above op-
eration again.

21
 Power windows
You can set or cancel the automatic To select the unlocking linked with the
unlocking functions: shift position:
Be sure to apply the parking brake when 1. Close all doors and turn the ignition
performing the following operations. switch to the “ON” position.
To select the unlocking linked with the 2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-
ignition switch: tion.
12C010a
1. Close all doors and turn the ignition 3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni-
switch to the “ON” position. tion switch to the “ON” position, press
2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the and hold the driver’s side power door
“N” position. lock switch in the unlock position for
5 seconds and then release.
3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni-
tion switch to the “ON” position, press The doors will be locked and unlocked
and hold the driver’s side power door to indicate that the function is set.
The windows can be operated with the
lock switch in the unlock position for To cancel the function, do the above op- switch on each side door.
5 seconds and then release. eration again.
The power windows work when the ignition
The doors will be locked and unlocked switch is in the “ON” position.
to indicate that the function is set.
Key off operation: If both front doors are
To cancel the function, do the above op- closed, they work for 45 seconds even
eration again. after the ignition switch is turned off. They
stop working when either front door is
opened.
OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW
Use the switch on the driver’s door.
Normal operation: The window moves as
long as you hold the switch.
To open: Lightly push down the switch.
To close: Lightly pull up the switch.

22
 Window lock
switch

12C011a l12088a 12C007b

Automatic operation: Push the switch OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’ WIN- Automatic operation: Push the switch
completely down or pull it completely up, DOWS completely down or pull it completely up,
and then release it. The window will fully Use the switch on each passenger’s and then release it. The window will fully
open or close. To stop the window part- door or the switches on the driver’s open or close. To stop the window part-
way, lightly move the switch in the oppo- door that control each passenger’s win- way, lightly move the switch in the oppo-
site direction and then release it. dow. site direction and then release it.
Jam protection function: If something Normal operation: The window moves as Jam protection function: If something
gets caught between the window and win- long as you hold the switch. gets caught between the window and win-
dow frame during automatic closing opera- dow frame during automatic closing opera-
tion or key off closing operation, the win- To open: Lightly push down the switch. tion or key off closing operation, the win-
dow stops and opens halfway. To close: Lightly pull up the switch. dow stops and opens halfway.
If the window receives a strong impact, If you push in the window lock switch on If the window receives a strong impact,
this function may work even if nothing is the driver’s door, the passengers’ windows this function may work even if nothing is
caught. cannot be operated. caught.
The indicator lights on the switch tell you
which of the switches can be operated.

23
 CAUTION D Never leave anyone (particularly a
small child) alone in your vehicle,
To avoid serious personal injury, you especially with the ignition key still
must do the following. inserted. Otherwise, he or she
D Before you close the power win- could use the power window
dows, always make sure there is switches and get trapped in a win-
nobody around the power windows. dow. Unattended person (particular-
You must also make sure the ly a small child) can be involved in
heads, hands and other parts of the a serious accident.
bodies of all occupants are kept D Never try jamming any part of your
12c012b
completely inside the vehicle. If body in a window to activate the
someone’s neck, head or hands get jam protection function intention-
caught in a closing window, it ally.
could result in death or serious in- D The jam protection function may
jury. When anyone closes the power not work if something gets caught
windows, make sure he or she op- just before the window is fully
erates the windows safely. closed.
D When small children are in the ve-
hicle, never let them use the power
window switches without supervi-
sion. Use the window lock switch to
prevent them from making unex-
pected use of the switches.
D Be sure to remove the ignition key
when you leave your vehicle.

24
Power quarter windows Back door

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, you

must do the following.
D Before you close the power quarter
windows, always make sure there is
nobody around the power quarter
windows. You must also make sure
the hands and other parts of the
bodies of all occupants are kept
completely inside the vehicle. If
someone’s hands get caught in a
closing window, it could result in a
The rear quarter windows can be oper- serious injury. When anyone closes LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY
ated with the “REAR VENT” switches the power quarter windows, make Insert the key into the key hole and
on the instrument panel. sure he or she operates the win- turn it.
The power rear quarter windows work dows safely.
To lock: Turn the key clockwise.
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” D Be sure to remove the ignition key To unlock: Turn the key counterclockwise.
position. when you leave your vehicle.
All the doors lock and unlock simulta-
Both left and right rear quarter windows D Never leave anyone (particularly a neously with back door.
move as long as you hold the switch. small child) alone in your vehicle,
especially with the ignition key still Operating the power door lock switch si-
To open: Push the right one of the multaneously locks or unlocks all the side
switches. inserted. Otherwise, he or she
could use the power quarter win- doors and the back door. (See “—Locking
To close: Push the left one of the and unlocking doors” on page 14 and
switches. dow switches and get trapped in a
window. Unattended person (particu- “Side doors” on page 18.)
larly a small child) can be involved To open the back door, pull the lock re-
in a serious accident. lease lever.

25
Pull the handle toward you and pull LOCKING AND UNLOCKING FROM IN- Push the handle and push down the
down the lower side of the back door. SIDE lower side of the back door.
When closing the back door, make sure To lock: Push the knob. When closing the back door, make sure
it is fully closed. To unlock: Pull the knob. it is fully closed.
See “Cargo and luggage” on page 247 for Operating the power door lock switch si- See “Cargo and luggage” on page 247 for
precautions when loading luggage. multaneously locks or unlocks all the side precautions when loading luggage.
doors and the back door. (See “Side
doors” on page 18.)

26
 CAUTION CAUTION

D Keep the back door closed while Before driving, be sure that the back
driving. This not only keeps the door is closed and locked, especially
luggage from being thrown out but when small children are in the ve-
also prevents exhaust gases from hicle. Along with the proper use of
entering the vehicle. seat belts, locking the doors helps
D If the open back door hides the prevent the driver and passengers
stop and tail lights, rear turn signal from being thrown out from the ve-
lights or rear retro reflectors while hicle in an accident. It also helps pre-
you are parked, other road users vent the doors from being opened
must be warned of the presence of unintentionally.
your vehicle by a warning triangle
or other device. BACK DOOR CHILD- PROTECTOR
Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”
position as shown on the label.
When the child- protector is locked, you
cannot open the back door by the inside
door handle. We recommend using this
feature whenever small children are in the
vehicle.

27
Hood Theft deterrent system

To open the hood: 2. In front of the vehicle, pull up the To deter vehicle theft, the system is
1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The auxiliary catch lever and lift the designed to sound an alarm if any of
hood will spring up slightly. hood. the side doors, back door or hood is
Before closing the hood, check to see that forcibly unlocked or opened or the bat-
you have not forgotten any tools, rags, tery terminal is disconnected and then
CAUTION
etc. Then lower the hood and make sure reconnected when the vehicle is locked.
Before driving, be sure that the hood it locks into place. If necessary, press The alarm blows the horn intermittently
is closed and securely locked. Other- down gently on the front edge to lock it. and flashes the headlights, tail lights and
wise, the hood may open unexpected- other exterior lights.
ly while driving and an accident may
occur.

28
 The system will automatically be set after If any of the side door or back door is
30 seconds. When the system is set, the unlocked without the key or wireless re-
indicator light will start flashing again. mote control key and the key is not in the
4. After making sure the indicator light ignition switch, all the side doors and
starts flashing, you may leave the ve- back door will be automatically locked
hicle. again.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle when After one minute, the alarm will automati-
you set the system, because unlocking cally stop and the indicator light will starts
from the inside will activate the system. flashing again.

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET Reactivating the alarm

Activating the system Once set, the system automatically resets

the alarm after the alarm stops.
The system will sound the alarm under
the following conditions: The alarm will activate again under the
SETTING THE SYSTEM same circumstances described in
1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” D If any of the side doors is unlocked or “Activating the system”.
opened without the key or wireless re-
position and remove it. Stopping the alarm
mote control key, or if the back door
The indicator light will start flashing when or hood is forcibly opened The alarm will be stopped by the following
the key is removed from the ignition two ways:
switch. (See “Engine immobilizer system” D If the battery terminal is disconnected
on page 12 for details.) and then reconnected D Start the engine, and the alarm stops
The indicator light will come on when the after 2 seconds.
2. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. system is activated. D Unlock any of the side doors or back
door with the key or wireless remote
3. Close and lock all the side doors, back control key.
door and hood.
These ways cancel the system at the
The indicator light will come on when all same time.
the side doors, back door and hood are
closed and locked.

29
 Fuel tank cap
TESTING THE SYSTEM
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the system as described above.
The side doors and back door should
be locked with the key or wireless re-
mote control key. Be sure to wait until
the indicator light goes off or starts 12C503
flashing.
3. Unlock any side door or back door
from the inside. The system should ac-
tivate the alarm.
4. Stop the alarm as described above.
5. Repeat this operation for the other
This indicates that the fuel filler door 1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the
doors, back door and hood. When test- is on the left side of your vehicle. lever.
ing the hood, also check that the sys-
tem is activated when the battery ter- When refueling, turn off the engine.
minal is disconnected and then
reconnected. CAUTION
If the system does not work properly,
D Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-
have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
low open flames when refueling.
The fumes are flammable.
D When opening the cap, do not re-
move the cap quickly. In hot weath-
er, fuel under pressure could cause
injury by spraying out of the filler
neck if the cap is suddenly re-
moved.

30
 Electric moon roof

CAUTION

D Make sure the cap is installed se-

curely to prevent fuel spillage in
the event of an accident.
D Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tank
12C006b cap for replacement. It is designed
to regulate fuel tank pressure.

Sliding operation
2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn
the cap slowly counterclockwise,
then pause slightly before removing
it. After removing the cap, hang it
on the cap hanger.
It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh
when the cap is opened. When installing,
turn the cap clockwise till you hear a
click.
If the cap is not tightened securely, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on.
Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

Tilting operation

31
To operate the moon roof, use the The roof will fully close. To stop the roof If the battery terminals is disconnected
switches beside the personal light. partway, push the same switch or tilt or the battery is run down, the moon
The moon roof works when the ignition switch. roof may not operate automatically and
switch is in the “ON” position. However, Tilting operation— the jam protection function will not operate
if both front doors are closed, it works for correctly after you reconnect, replace or
To tilt up: Push the “TILT” switch on the recharge the battery with the moon roof
45 seconds even after the ignition switch “UP” side.
is turned off. It stops working when either slide- opened or tilted up. In any of these
of the front doors is opened. The roof will tilt up fully. To stop the roof cases, you should return the moon roof to
partway, push the same switch or slide normal.
Sun shade operation— switch. To normalize the moon roof, push and
The sun shade can be opened or closed To lower: Push the “TILT” switch on the hold the switch until the moon roof is
by hand. opposite side of the “UP” side. closed or tilted down completely.
Sliding operation— The roof will fully close. To stop the roof Make sure the moon roof opens and
To open: Push the “SLIDE” switch on the partway, push the same switch or slide closes automatically. If the moon roof can-
rear side. switch. not be operated properly, have it checked
The roof will open and stop partway 30 Jam protection function (closing opera- by your Toyota dealer.
mm (1.2 in.) from the fully opened posi- tion only): If something gets caught be-
tion. When you push the switch again, the tween the moon roof and frame during
moon roof will open fully. To stop the roof closing operation, the moon roof stops and
partway, push the same switch or tilt opens halfway.
switch while the roof is moving. If an impact is given to the moon roof,
As driving with the moon roof opened fully this function may work without anything
will cause wind throbs, we recommend caught.
you to drive with the moon roof partway
30 mm (1.2 in.) from the fully opened
position.
The sun shade will be opened together
with the roof.
To close: Push the “SLIDE” switch on the
front side.
32
 CAUTION D Never leave anyone (particularly a
small child) alone in your vehicle,
To avoid serious personal injury, you especially with the ignition key still
must do the following. inserted. Otherwise, he or she
D While the vehicle is moving, always could use the moon roof switches
keep the heads, hands and other and get trapped in the roof open-
parts of the bodies of all occupants ing. Unattended person (particularly
away from the roof opening. Other- a small child) can be involved in a
wise, they could be seriously in- serious accident.
jured if the vehicle stops suddenly D Never sit on top of the vehicle
or if the vehicle is involved in an around the roof opening.
accident. D Never try jamming any part of your
D Before you close the moon roof, body to activate the jam protection
always make sure there is nobody function intentionally.
around the moon roof. You must D The jam protection function may
also make sure nobody places his not work when something gets
or her head, hands and other parts caught just before the moon roof is
of the body in the roof opening. If fully closed.
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in the closing roof, it could
result in death or serious injury.
When anyone closes the moon roof,
first make sure it is safe to do so.
D Be sure to remove the ignition key
when you leave your vehicle.

33
34
 SECTION 1- 3
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Occupant restraint systems
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Seat heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags with roll sensing function
67
Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

35
 Front seats—
Seats —Front seat precautions
While the vehicle is being driven, all ve- Driver seat
hicle occupants should have the seatback D Slightly recline the back of the
upright, sit well back in the seat and prop- CAUTION seat. Although vehicle designs vary,
erly wear the seat belts provided. many drivers can achieve the 250
The SRS driver airbag deploys with mm (10 in.) distance, even with the
CAUTION considerable force, and can cause driver seat all the way forward, sim-
death or serious injury especially if ply by reclining the back of the
D Do not drive the vehicle unless the the driver is very close to the airbag. seat somewhat. If reclining the back
occupants are properly seated. Do The National Highway Traffic Safety of your seat makes it hard to see
not allow any passengers to sit on Administration (“NHTSA”) advises: the road, raise yourself by using a
top of a folded- down seatback, or firm, non- slippery cushion, or raise
Since the risk zone for driver airbag the seat if your vehicle has that
in the luggage compartment or car- is the first 50 – 75 mm (2 – 3 in.) of
go area. Persons not properly feature.
inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10
seated and/or not properly re- in.) from your driver airbag provides D If your steering wheel is adjustable,
strained by seat belts can be se- you with a clear margin of safety. tilt it downward. This points the air-
verely injured in the event of emer- This distance is measured from the bag toward your chest instead of
gency braking or a collision. center of the steering wheel to your your head and neck.
D During driving, do not allow any breastbone. If you sit less than 250 The seat should be adjusted as rec-
passengers to stand up or move mm (10 in.) away now, you can ommended by NHTSA above, while
around between seats. Otherwise, change your driving position in sever- still maintaining control of the foot
severe injuries can occur in the al ways: pedals, steering wheel, and your view
event of emergency braking or a D Move your seat to the rear as far of the instrument panel controls.
collision. as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.

36
 —Seat adjustment
precautions
Front passenger seat Front seats (with SRS side airbags)
CAUTION
CAUTION CAUTION
D Do not adjust the seat while the
The SRS front passenger airbag also The SRS side airbags are installed in vehicle is moving as the seat may
unexpectedly move and cause the
deploys with considerable force, and the driver and front passenger seats.
driver to lose control of the vehicle.
can cause death or serious injury es- Observe the following precautions.
pecially if the front passenger is very D Be careful that the seat does not
D Do not lean against the front door hit a passenger, luggage or the rear
close to the airbag. The front passen- when the vehicle is in use, since
ger seat should be as far from the seat.
the side airbag inflates with consid-
airbag as possible with the seatback erable speed and force. Otherwise,
adjusted, so the front passenger sits you may be killed or severely in- NOTICE
upright. jured.
Do not operate the control switch in
D Do not use seat accessories which more than one dimension at a time.
cover the area where the side air-
It may cause electrical overload.
bags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from acti-
vating correctly, causing death or
serious injury.
D Do not modify or replace the seats
or upholstery of the seats equipped
with side airbags. Such change may
prevent the side airbag system from
activating correctly, disable the sys-
tem or cause the side airbags to
inflate accidentally, resulting in
death or serious injury.

37
—Adjusting front seats
1. SEAT POSITION AND SEAT CUSHION
ANGLE ADJUSTING SWITCH CAUTION
Move the control switch in the desired
Avoid reclining the seatback any
direction.
more than needed. The seat belts pro-
Releasing the switch will stop the seat at vide maximum protection in a frontal
that position. or rear collision when the driver and
Do not place anything under the front the front passenger are sitting up
seats, as this might interfere with the seat straight and well back in the seats. If
movement. you are reclined, the lap belt may
slide past your hips and apply re-
2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING
straint forces directly to the abdomen
SWITCH or your neck may contact the shoul-
I13380b Move the control switch in the desired der belt. In the event of a frontal
direction. collision, the more the seat is re-
Releasing the switch will stop the seat- clined, the greater the risk of death
back at that position. or personal injury.

3. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT ADJUST-

ING SWITCH
Push the control switch on either side.
The amount of lumbar support will change
while the switch is pushed.

38
 Rear seats—
Armrest —Rear seat precautions
Tumbling the seats will enlarge the lug-
CAUTION gage compartment. See “Cargo and lug-
gage” on page 247 for precautions when
D Do not adjust the seat while the loading luggage.
vehicle is moving.
D Be careful that the seat does not
hit a passenger or luggage.
D After adjusting the seatback, push
your body back against the seat to
make sure the seat is locked in
position.
D When returning seats to their origi-
nal position, observe the following
To use the armrest, pull it down as in order to prevent personal injury
shown above. in a collision or sudden stop:
Make sure the seat is securely
NOTICE locked by pushing forward and rear-
ward on the top of the seatback
To prevent damage to the armrest,
and by trying to pull up the edge
avoid putting heavy loads on it.
of the bottom cushion. Failure to
do so will prevent seat belt from
operating properly.
Make sure the seat belts are not
twisted or caught under the seat
and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.

39
 —Moving second seat for
—Adjusting second seats third seat entry
SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING LEVER
Lean forward and pull the lever toward
you. Then lean back to the desired
angle and release the lever.

CAUTION

D Avoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts
provide maximum protection in a
frontal or rear collision when the
second seat passengers are sitting
up straight and well back in the
I13220c seats. If you are reclined, the lap
belt may slide past your hips and For easy access to the third seat:
apply restraint forces directly to the 1. Lower the head restraint to the low-
abdomen or your neck may contact est position.
the shoulder belt. In the event of a 2. Push the seatback angle adjusting
frontal collision, the more the seat lever and pull the seat cushion lock
is reclined, the greater the risk of release lever or pull the strap.
death or personal injury.
After passengers are in, return the seat
D Do not adjust the seat while the until it locks.
vehicle is moving.
D After adjusting the seatback, push
your body back against the seat to
make sure the seat is locked in
position.

40
 —Tumbling second seat

CAUTION

After returning the seat, make sure

the seat is securely locked by push-
ing forward and rearward on the top
of the seatback and by trying to pull
up the edge of the bottom cushion. I13378b I13340a

BEFORE TUMBLING SECOND SEAT 2. Make sure the shoulder belt passes
1. Stow the second seat belt buckles through the hanger when folding the
as shown in the illustration. second seat.
This prevents the seat belt buckles from This prevents the shoulder belt from being
falling out when you tumble the second damaged.
seat.
CAUTION
NOTICE
The seat belt must be removed from
The seat belt buckles must be stowed the hanger when the seat belt is in
before you tumble the second seat. use.

41
TUMBLING SECOND SEAT 2. Unlock the seat cushion. Swing the 3. Hook the strap.
1. Lower the outer head restraint to the whole seat up and forward. When returning the second seat to its
lowest position and pull up the cen- original position, put the holding strap into
ter head restraint. Unlock the seat- the hole.
back and fold it down.
Tumbling the rear seats will enlarge the
luggage compartment. See “Cargo and
luggage” on page 247 for precautions
when loading luggage.

42
 CAUTION

When returning seats to their original

position, observe the following pre-
cautions in order to prevent personal
injury in a collision or sudden stop:
D Make sure the seat is securely
locked by pushing forward and rear-
ward on the top of the seatback
and by trying to pull up the edge
of the bottom cushion. Failure to
do so will prevent seat belt from
operating properly.
4. Remove the seat hook covers from WHEN RETURNING THE SECOND SEAT D Make sure the seat belts are not
the back of the seat cushion, and If you cannot raise the seatback be- twisted or caught under the seat
install them over the seat hooks. cause of the locked seat belt, do not and are arranged in their proper
try it hard. Release the lock of the seat position and are ready to use.
CAUTION belt in the following way. Push in the
lower front edge of the seatback cush-
Be sure to apply the covers on the ion to slacken the seat belt (1) and let
seat hooks, or you may get burned the seat belt retract a little (2).
when they become hot.

When returning the second seat to its

original position, remove the seat hook
covers from the floor and install them in
the back of the seat cushion.

43
—Adjusting third seats —Tumbling third seats
SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING LEVER
Lean forward and pull the lever toward
you. Then lean back to the desired
angle and release the lever.

CAUTION
I13377b
D Avoid reclining the seatback any
more than needed. The seat belts
provide maximum protection in a
frontal or rear collision when the
third seat passengers are sitting up
straight and well back in the seats.
If you are reclined, the lap belt may
slide past your hips and apply re- BEFORE TUMBLING THIRD SEAT
straint forces directly to the abdo- 1. Stow the third seat belt and buckles
men or your neck may contact the as shown in the illustration.
shoulder belt. In the event of a This prevents the seat belt and buckles
frontal collision, the more the seat from falling out when you tumble the third
is reclined, the greater the risk of seat.
death or personal injury.
D Do not adjust the seat while the NOTICE
vehicle is moving.
The seat belt and buckles must be
D After adjusting the seatback, push stowed before you tumble the third
your body back against the seat to seat.
make sure the seat is locked in
position.

44
 I13262c

2. Make sure the shoulder belt passes TUMBLING THIRD SEAT 2. Unlock the seat cushion and slide
through the hanger when folding the 1. Lower the head restraint to the low- the whole seat to the rear- most
third seat. est position. Unlock the seatback position while pulling up the handle.
This prevents the shoulder belt from being and fold it down.
damaged. Tumbling the third seats will enlarge the
luggage compartment. See “Cargo and
CAUTION luggage” on page 247 for precautions
when loading luggage.
The seat belt must be removed from
the hanger when the seat belt is in
use.

45
 13c558
13c559
13c557a

3. Swing the whole seat up. 4. Hook the strap. 5. Remove the seat hook covers from
When returning the third seat to its origi- the back of the seat cushion, and
nal position, put the holding strap into the install them over the seat hooks.
hole.
CAUTION

Be sure to apply the covers on the

seat hooks, or you may get burned
when they become hot.

When returning the third seat to its origi-

nal position, remove the seat hook covers
from the floor and install them in the back
of the seat cushion.

46
 —Removing third seats

CAUTION

When returning seats to their original

position, observe the following pre-
cautions in order to prevent personal
injury in a collision or sudden stop:
D Make sure the seat is securely
locked by pushing forward and rear-
ward on the top of the seatback
and by trying to pull up the edge
of the bottom cushion. Be certain
to replace head restraint. Failure to
do so will prevent seat belt from
operating properly. After tumbling the third seat, open the Remove the seat hook covers from the
D Make sure the seat belts are not cover, hold the whole seat and pull it back of the seat cushion, and install
twisted or caught under the seat up while pulling the handle toward you. them over the seat hooks.
and are arranged in their proper Removing the third seat will enlarge the
position and are ready to use. luggage compartment. See “Cargo and CAUTION
luggage” on page 247 for precautions
when loading luggage. Be sure to apply the covers on the
seat hooks, or you may get burned
when they become hot.

When returning the third seat to its origi-

nal position, remove the seat hook covers
from the floor and install them in the back
of the seat cushion.

47
 Head restraints

CAUTION D When reinstalling the seat, be care-

ful not to hit the seat against you
When removing or reinstalling the or inside of the vehicle.
seat, observe the following precau- D Install each seat in the same posi-
tions to prevent personal injury: tion from which it was removed.
D Do not fold or remove the seat Failure to do so will prevent third
while the vehicle is moving. seat occupants from using seat
D Be careful not to get your hands or belts properly.
feet pinched in the seat.
D Be careful not to hit the removed NOTICE
seat against a person or drop it on
yourself. Avoid putting heavy loads on the re-
moved seat. The metallic tips of the Front
D After tumbling or installing the
seat legs may be damaged and the
seat, push it forward and backward
seat cannot be reinstalled.
to make sure it is locked in posi-
tion.
To prevent personal injury in a colli-
sion or sudden stop:
D Do not sit on or place anything on
the folded seatback while driving. I13375b
D Do not leave the removed seat
loose in the vehicle.
D Do not try to sit on or place any-
thing on the removed seat.

Rear

48
 Seat heaters
For your safety and comfort, adjust the Right side
head restraint before driving. front seat CAUTION
To raise: Pull it up.
Occupants must use caution when op-
To lower: Push it down while pressing the
erating the seat heater because it
lock release button.
may make them feel too hot or cause
Front head restraint only—You can also burns at low temperatures (erythema,
move the head restraint forward or back- varicella). Use extra caution for;
ward. If such adjustment is desired, pull
Left side
D Babies, small children, elderly per-
or push the head restraint. sons, sick persons or persons with
front seat
Rear center head restraint—When an oc- physical disabilities
cupant sits on the rear center seat, al-
D Persons who have sensitive skin
ways pull up the rear center head re-
straint to the lock position. D Persons who are exhausted
The head restraint is most effective when To turn on the seat heater, push the D Persons who have taken alcohol or
it is close to your head. Therefore, using switch to “HI” (high heating tempera- drugs which induce sleep (sleeping
a cushion on the seatback is not recom- ture) or “LO” (low heating temperature). drug, cold remedy, etc.)
mended. At this time, the indicator light on ei- To prevent the seat from overheating,
ther side will illuminate to indicate the do not use the seat heater with a
CAUTION seat heater is operating. To turn off the blanket, cushion, or other insulating
seat heater, push the switch lightly on objects which cover the seat.
D Adjust the center of the head re- the opposite side.
straint so that it is closest to the The ignition key must be in the “ON” posi-
top of your ears. tion to operate seat heaters.
D After adjusting the head restraint,
make sure it is locked in position.
D Do not drive with the head re-
straints removed.

49
 Seat belts—
—Seat belt precautions
Toyota strongly urges that the driver and Do not allow any children to stand up or
NOTICE
passengers in the vehicle be properly re- kneel on either rear or front seats. An
z Do not put unevenly weighed ob- strained at all times with the seat belts unrestrained child could suffer serious in-
jects on the seat and do not stick provided. Failure to do so could increase jury or death during emergency braking or
sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) the chance of injury and/or the severity of a collision. Also, do not let the child sit
into the seat. injury in accidents. on your lap. Holding a child in your arms
The seat belts provided for your vehicle does not provide sufficient restraint.
z When cleaning the seats, do not
use organic substances (paint thin- are designed for people of adult size, Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the
ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline, large enough to properly wear them. use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for
etc.). They may damage the heater Child. Use a child restraint system ap- specific recommendations. The lap belt
and seat surface. propriate for the child until the child be- should be worn securely and as low as
comes large enough to properly wear the possible over the hips and not on the
z To prevent the battery from being
vehicle’s seat belts. (For details, see waist.
discharged, turn the switch off
when the engine is not running. “Child restraint” on page 78.) Injured person. Toyota recommends the
If a child is too large for a child restraint use of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-
system, the child should sit in the rear ry, first check with your doctor for specific
seat and must be restrained using the recommendations.
vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident
statistics, the child is safer when properly
restrained in the rear seat than in the
front seat.
If a child must sit in the front seat, the
seat belts should be worn properly. If an
accident occurs and the seat belts are not
worn properly, the force of the rapid infla-
tion of the airbag may cause death or
serious injury to the child.

50
 —Fastening 3- point seat belts

CAUTION D Be careful not to damage the belt

webbing or hardware. Take care that
Persons should ride in their seats they do not get caught or pinched
properly wearing their seat belts in the seat or doors.
whenever the vehicle is moving. D Inspect the belt system periodically.
Otherwise, they are much more likely Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
to suffer serious bodily injury or parts. Damaged parts should be re-
death in the event of sudden braking placed. Do not disassemble or Tab
or a collision. modify the system.
Buckle
When using the seat belts, observe D Keep the belts clean and dry. If
the following: they need cleaning, use a mild soap
D Use the belt for only one person at solution or lukewarm water. Never
a time. Do not use a single belt for use bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-
two or more people—even children. ers, or allow them to come into Adjust the seat as needed and sit up
contact with the belt—they may se- straight and well back in the seat. To
D Avoid reclining the seatback any fasten your belt, pull it out of the re-
more than needed. The seat belts verely weaken the belts. (See
“Cleaning the interior” on page tractor and insert the tab into the
provide maximum protection in a buckle.
frontal or rear collision when the 297.)
driver and the front passenger are D Replace the belt assembly (includ- You will hear a click when the tab locks
sitting up straight and well back in ing bolts) if it has been used in a into the buckle.
the seats. If you are reclined, the severe impact. The entire assembly The seat belt length automatically adjusts
lap belt may slide past your hips should be replaced even if damage to your size and the seat position.
and apply restraint forces directly is not obvious. The retractor will lock the belt during a
to the abdomen or your neck may sudden stop or on impact. It also may
contact the shoulder belt. In the lock if you lean forward too quickly. A
event of a frontal collision, the slow easy motion will allow the belt to
more the seat is reclined, the great- extend, and you can move around freely.
er the risk of death or personal in-
jury.

51
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-
pletely extended and is then retracted CAUTION
even slightly, the belt is locked in that Take up
slack D Both high- positioned lap belts and
position and cannot be extended. This fea-
ture is used to hold the child restraint loose- fitting belts could cause seri-
system securely. (For details, see “Child Too high ous injuries due to sliding under the
restraint” on page 78.) To free the belt lap belt during a collision or other
again, fully retract the belt and then pull unintended event. Keep the lap belt
the belt out once more. positioned as low on hips as pos-
sible.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the
retractor, firmly pull the belt and release D Do not place the shoulder belt un-
it. You will then be able to smoothly pull Keep as low on hips as possible der your arm.
the belt out of the retractor.

CAUTION Adjust the position of the lap and

shoulder belts.
D After inserting the tab, make sure Position the lap belt as low as possible
the tab and buckle are locked and on your hips–not on your waist, then ad-
that the lap and shoulder portions just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder
of the belt are not twisted. portion upward through the latch plate.
D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
D If the seat belt does not function
normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
until the seat belt is fixed, because
it cannot protect an adult occupant
or your child from death or serious
injury.

52
 CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder belt

is positioned across the center of
l13197b your shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from your neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Failure to
do so could reduce the amount of
protection in an accident and cause
serious injuries in a collision.

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder To release the belt, press the buckle
anchor— release button and allow the belt to
Adjust the shoulder anchor position to retract.
your size. If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull
To raise: Slide the anchor up. it out and check for kinks or twists. Then
To lower: Push in the lock release button make sure it remains untwisted as it re-
and slide the anchor down. tracts.
After adjustment, make sure the anchor is
locked in position.

53
—Fastening 2- point seat belts

Lengthen CAUTION Too high

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap portion of the belt is
not twisted.
Adjust to a snug fit
D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
Tab from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
Buckle
D If the seat belt does not function Keep as low on hips as possible
normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
Sit up straight and well back in the until the seat belt is fixed, because Remove excess length of the belt and
seat. To fasten your belt, insert the tab it cannot protect an adult occupant adjust the belt position.
into the buckle. or your child from injury. To shorten the belt, pull the free end of
You will hear a click when the tab locks the belt.
into the buckle. Position the lap belt as low as possible
If the belt is not long enough for you, hold on your hips—not on your waist, then ad-
the tab at a right angle to the belt and just it to a snug fit.
pull on the tab.
CAUTION

Both high- positioned and loose- fit-

ting lap belts could cause serious in-
juries due to sliding under the lap belt
during a collision or other unintended
event. Keep the lap belt positioned as
low on hips as possible.

54
 —Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened se-
curely because they are not long enough,
a personalized seat belt extender is avail-
able from your Toyota dealer free of
charge.
Please contact your local Toyota dealer so
that the dealer can order the proper re-
quired length for the extender. Bring the
heaviest coat you expect to wear for prop-
er measurement and selection of length.
Additional ordering information is available
at your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION
To release the belt, press the buckle
release button. D If the seat belt extender has been
When using the seat belt extender,
connected to the driver’s seat belt
observe the following precautions. buckle without the driver actually
Failure to follow these instructions wearing the seat belt, the SRS driv-
could reduce the effectiveness of the
er’s airbag system will judge that
seat belt restraint system in case of the driver is wearing it. In this
an accident, increasing the chance of case, the driver’s airbag may not
personal injury.
activate correctly, causing death or
D Remember that the extender pro- serious injury in the event of colli-
vided for you may not be safe when sion. Be sure to wear the seat belt
used on a different vehicle, for with the seat belt extender.
another person, or at a different
seating position than the one origi-
nally intended.

55
D Do not use the seat belt extender CAUTION
if it is not absolutely necessary.
D Do not use the seat belt extender D After inserting the tab, make sure
when installing a child restraint the tab and buckle are locked and
system on the front or rear passen- that the lap and shoulder portions
ger seat. If installing a child re- of the belt and the seat belt extend-
straint system with the seat belt er are not twisted.
extender connected to the seat belt, D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the seat belt will not securely hold the buckle as this may prevent you
the child restraint system, which from properly latching the tab and
could cause death or serious injury buckle.
to the child or other passengers in D If the seat belt does not function
the event of collision. normally, immediately contact your
To connect the extender to the seat Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
belt, insert the tab into the seat belt until the seat belt is fixed, because
buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on it cannot protect an adult occupant
the buckle release buttons of the ex- or your child from injury.
tender and the seat belt are both facing
outward as shown.
You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
When releasing the seat belt, press on
the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt. This helps prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and extend-
er itself.
When not in use, remove the extender
and store in the vehicle for future use.

56
—Seat belt pretensioners

CAUTION

D Make sure the roll sensing of cur-

tain shield airbags off indicator
light is not on.
D When the roll sensing of curtain
shield airbags off switch is turned
on (and the roll sensing of curtain
shield airbags off indicator light is
on), the seat belt pretensioners will
not operate in a vehicle rollover
and turning off the seat belt preten-
sioners can reduce the occupant
The driver and front passenger seat belt Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags protection which your vehicle safety
pretensioners are designed to be acti- off indicator light systems can provide to you in cer-
vated in response to a severe frontal The seat belt pretensioners will not oper- tain accidents and increase the like-
impact or a vehicle rollover. ate in a vehicle rollover if the roll sensing lihood of death or serious injuries.
When the sensor detects a severe frontal of curtain shield airbags off indicator light
impact or a vehicle rollover, the front seat is on. For details, see “Roll sensing of
belts are quickly drawn back by the re- curtain shield airbags off switch” on page
tractor so that the belts snugly restrain 68.
the occupants.
The seat belt pretensioners are activated
even with no passenger in the front seat.
The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air-
bags may not operate together in all colli-
sions.

57
 When the seat belt pretensioners are acti-
vated, an operating noise may be heard D Do not use tires or wheels other
and a small amount of non- toxic gas may than the manufacturer’s recom-
be released. This does not indicate that mended size. Such a use may cause
a fire is occurring. This gas is normally the curtain shield airbags and seat
harmless. belt pretensioners to inflate acci-
Once the seat belt pretensioners have dentally, resulting in death or seri-
been activated, the seat belt retractors ous injury. For details, see “Check-
remain locked. ing and replacing tires” on page
323.
CAUTION D Do not place luggage heavier than
specified on the roof luggage carri-
D Do not modify, remove, strike or er. Such luggage may cause the
open the seat belt pretensioner as- curtain shield airbags and seat belt
The seat belt pretensioner system con- semblies, airbag sensor or sur- pretensioners to inflate accidentally,
sists mainly of the following components, rounding area or wiring. Failure to resulting in death or serious injury.
and their locations are shown in the il- follow these instructions may pre- For details, see “Roof luggage car-
lustration. vent the seat belt pretensioners rier” on page 218.
1. Front airbag sensors from activating correctly, cause sud- D Do not modify or change the sus-
den operation of the system or dis- pension system. Such changes may
2. SRS warning light able the system, which could result cause the curtain shield airbags to
3. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies in death or serious injury. inflate accidentally, resulting in
4. Airbag sensor assembly death or serious injury.
The seat belt pretensioners are controlled Failure to follow these instructions
by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag can result in death or serious inju-
sensor assembly consists of a safing sen- ries. Consult your Toyota dealer
sor and airbag sensor. about any repair and modification.

58
 If any of the following conditions occurs,
NOTICE
this indicates a malfunction of the airbags
Do not perform any of the following or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your
changes without consulting your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
Toyota dealer. Such changes can D The light does not come on when the
interfere with proper operation of the ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-
seat belt pretensioners in some tion or remains on for more than 6
cases. seconds or flashes.
z Installation of electronic devices D The light comes on or starts flashing
such as a mobile two- way radio, while driving.
cassette tape player or compact
disc player D If any seat belt does not retract or can
not be pulled out due to a malfunction
z Repairs on or near the front seat or activation of the relevant seat belt
belt retractor assemblies This indicator comes on when the igni- pretensioner.
z Modification of the front end struc- tion key is turned to the “ON” position. D The seat belt pretensioner assembly or
ture It goes off after about 6 seconds. This surrounding area has been damaged.
z Attachment of a grille guard (bull means the seat belt pretensioners are
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow, operating properly.
winches or any other equipment to This warning light system monitors the
the front end airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-
z Repairs made on or near the front sors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor
fenders, front end structure or con- assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor
sole assemblies, driver’s seat position sensor,
driver’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt
pretensioner assemblies, inflators, roll
sensing of curtain shield airbags off indi-
cator light, interconnecting wiring and pow-
er sources. (For details, see “Service re-
minder indicators and warning buzzers” on
page 124.)
59
 SRS driver airbag and front
passenger airbag

CAUTION

D The SRS front airbag system is de-

signed only as a supplement to the
primary protection of the driver and
front passenger seat belt systems.
13c560
The driver and front passenger can
be killed or seriously injured by the
inflating airbags if they do not wear
the available seat belts properly.
During sudden braking just before
a collision, an unrestrained driver
or front passenger can move for-
ward into direct contact with or
In the following cases, contact your Toyota The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- close proximity to the airbag which
dealer as soon as possible: tem) front airbags are designed to pro- may then deploy during the colli-
D The front of the vehicle (shaded in the vide further protection for the driver sion. To ensure maximum protection
illustration) was involved in an accident and front passenger in addition to the in an accident, the driver and all
that was not severe enough to cause primary safety protection provided by passengers in the vehicle must
the seat belt pretensioners to operate. the seat belts. wear their seat belts properly. Wear-
In response to a severe frontal impact, ing a seat belt properly during an
D The seat belt pretensioner assembly or accident reduces the chances of
surrounding area is scratched, cracked, the SRS front airbags work together with
death or serious injury or being
or otherwise damaged. the seat belts to help reduce injury by
thrown out of the vehicle. For
inflating. The SRS front airbags help re-
instructions and precautions con-
duce injuries mainly to the driver’s or front
cerning the seat belt system, see
passenger’s head or chest caused by hit-
“Seat belts” on page 50.
ting the vehicle interior.
The front passenger airbag is activated
even with no passenger in the front seat.
Always wear your seat belt properly.

60
 The SRS front airbags are designed to
D Improperly seated and/or restrained deploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-
infants and children can be killed sions where the magnitude and duration
or seriously injured by the deploy- of the forward deceleration of the ve-
ing airbags. An infant or child who hicle exceeds the designed threshold
is too small to use a seat belt level. Collision from the rear
should be properly secured using a
child restraint system. Toyota The SRS front airbags will deploy if the
severity of the impact is above the de-
strongly recommends that all in-
signed threshold level, comparable to an
fants and children be placed in the
approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision Collision from the side
rear seat of the vehicle and proper-
when the vehicle has the impact straight
ly restrained. The rear seat is the
into a fixed barrier that does not move or Vehicle rollover
safest for infants and children. For
instructions concerning the installa- deform.
tion of a child restraint system, see However, this threshold velocity will be
The SRS front airbags are generally not
“Child restraint” on page 78. considerably higher if the vehicle strikes designed to inflate if the vehicle is in-
an object, such as a parked vehicle or
volved in a side or rear collision, if it
sign pole, which can move or deform on
rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an speed frontal collision. But, whenever a
underride collision (e.g. a collision in
collision of any type causes sufficient
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”,
forward deceleration of the vehicle, de-
or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.). ployment of the SRS front airbags may
It is possible that in some collisions occur.
where the forward deceleration of the ve-
hicle is very close to the designed thresh-
old level, the SRS front airbags and the
seat belt pretensioners may not activate
together.
Always wear your seat belts properly.

61
 The front airbag sensors constantly moni-
tor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.
If an impact results in a forward decelera-
tion beyond the designed threshold level,
Hitting a curb, Falling into or
edge of pavement the system triggers the airbag inflators. At
jumping over a
or hard surface this time a chemical reaction in the inflat-
deep hole
ors very quickly fills the airbags with non-
toxic gas to help restrain the forward mo-
tion of the occupants. The front airbags
then quickly deflate, so that there is no
obstruction of the driver’s vision should it
be necessary to continue driving.
Landing hard or vehicle falling
When the airbags inflate, they produce a
loud noise and release some smoke and
The SRS front airbags may also deploy The SRS front airbag system consists residue along with non- toxic gas. This
if a severe impact occurs to the under- mainly of the following components, and does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
side of your vehicle. Some examples their locations are shown in the illustra- remain inside the vehicle for some time,
are shown in the illustration. tion. and may cause some minor irritation to
1. Front airbag sensors the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to
wash off any residue as soon as possible
2. SRS warning light
to prevent any potential skin irritation with
3. Airbag module for front passenger soap and water.
(airbag and inflator)
If you can safely exit from the vehicle,
4. Airbag sensor assembly you should do so immediately.
5. Airbag module for driver
(airbag and inflator)
6. Driver’s seat position sensor
7. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
The airbag sensor assembly consists of a
safing sensor and airbag sensor.
62
Deployment of the airbags happens in a
fraction of a second, so the airbags must CAUTION D If the seat belt extender has been
inflate with considerable force. While the connected to the driver’s seat belt
system is designed to reduce serious inju- The driver or front passenger who is buckle without wearing the seat belt
ries, primarily to the head and chest, it too close to the steering wheel or when using the extender in the
may also cause other, less severe injuries dashboard during airbag deployment driver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-
to the face, chest, arms and hands. These can be killed or seriously injured. bag system will judge that the driv-
are usually in the nature of minor burns Toyota strongly recommends that: er wears the seat belt even if not
or abrasions and swelling, but the force of D The driver sit as far back as pos- wearing it. In this case, the driver’s
a deploying airbag can cause more seri- sible from the steering wheel while airbag may not activate correctly,
ous injuries, especially if an occupant’s still maintaining control of the ve- causing death or serious injury in
hands, arms, chest or head is in close hicle. the event of collision. Be sure to
proximity to the airbag module at the time wear the seat belt with the seat belt
D The front passenger sit as far back extender.
of deployment. This is why it is important
as possible from the dashboard.
for the occupant to: avoid placing any For instructions and precautions con-
object or part of the body between the D All vehicle occupants be properly cerning the seating position, see
occupant and the airbag module; sit restrained using the available seat “—Front seat precautions” on page
straight and well back into the seat; wear belts. 36.
the available seat belt properly; and sit as
far as possible from the airbag module,
while still maintaining control of the ve-
hicle.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel
hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot
for several minutes after deployment, so
do not touch! The airbags inflate only
once. The windshield may be damaged by
absorbing some of the force of the inflat-
ing airbag.

63
 D Do not hold a child on your lap or
in your arms. Use a child restraint
system in the rear seat. For instruc-
tions concerning the installation of
a child restraint system, see “Child
restraint” on page 78.

D Do not sit on the edge of the seat D Toyota strongly recommends that all
or lean against the dashboard when infants and children be placed in
the vehicle is in use, since the the rear seat of the vehicle and be
front passenger airbag could inflate properly restrained.
with considerable speed and force. D Do not allow a child to stand up or
Anyone who is up against, or very kneel on the front passenger seat,
close to, an airbag when it inflates, since the front passenger airbag
can be killed or seriously injured. could inflate with considerable
Sit up straight and well back in the speed and force. Otherwise, the
seat, and always use your seat belt child may be killed or seriously in-
properly. jured.

64
 D Do not modify or remove any wir- NOTICE
ing. Do not modify, remove, strike
Do not perform any of the following
or open any components such as
the steering wheel pad, steering changes without consulting your
wheel, column cover, dashboard Toyota dealer. Such changes can
near the front passenger airbag, interfere with proper operation of the
front passenger airbag or airbag SRS front airbag system in some
sensor assembly. Doing so may pre- cases.
vent the front airbag system from z Installation of electronic devices
activating correctly, cause sudden such as a mobile two- way radio,
activation of the system or disable cassette tape player or compact
the system, resulting in death or disc player
serious injury.
z Modification of the suspension sys-
Failure to follow these instructions tem
D Do not put anything or any part of can result in death or serious injury.
Consult your Toyota dealer about any z Modification of the front end struc-
your body on or in front of the
repair and modification. ture
dashboard or steering wheel pad
that houses the front airbag sys- z Attachment of a grille guard (bull
tem. They might restrict inflation or bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
cause death or serious injury as winches or any other equipment to
they are projected rearward by the the front end
force of deploying airbags. Like- z Repairs made on or near the front
wise, the driver and front passenger fenders, front end structure, con-
should not hold objects in their sole, steering column, steering
arms or on their knees.
wheel or dashboard near the front
passenger airbag

65
 If any of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction of the airbags
or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
D The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion or remains on for more than 6
seconds or flashes.
D The light comes on or starts flashing
while driving.

The indicator comes on when the igni- In the following cases, contact your Toyota
tion key is turned to the “ON” position. dealer as soon as possible:
It goes off after about 6 seconds. This D The SRS front airbags have been in-
means the SRS front airbags are oper- flated.
ating properly.
D The front of the vehicle (shaded in the
This warning light system monitors the illustration) was involved in an accident
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen- that was not severe enough to cause
sors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor the SRS front airbags to inflate.
assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor
assemblies, driver’s seat position sensor,
D The pad section of the steering wheel
or dashboard (shaded in the illustra-
driver’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt
tion) is scratched, cracked, or other-
pretensioner assemblies, inflators, roll
wise damaged.
sensing of curtain shield airbags off indi-
cator light, interconnecting wiring and pow- NOTICE
er sources. (For details, see “Service re-
minder indicators and warning buzzers” on Do not disconnect the battery cables
page 124.) before contacting your Toyota dealer.
66
SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags with roll sens-
ing function
In response to a severe side impact, the
SRS side airbags and curtain shield air- CAUTION
bags on impacted side work with the seat
belts to help reduce injury by inflating. D The SRS side airbag and curtain
The SRS side airbags help reduce injuries shield airbag system is designed
mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s only as a supplement to the prima-
chest, and the SRS curtain shield airbags ry protection of the driver, front
13c561a help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s, passenger and second seat passen-
front passenger’s or second seat passen- ger seat belt systems. To ensure
ger’s head and can help the driver, front maximum protection in an accident,
passenger and second seat passengers to the driver and all passengers in the
retain inside the vehicle. vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly. Wearing a seat belt prop-
Roll sensing function:
erly during an accident reduces the
In response to a vehicle rollover, the SRS
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- chances of death or serious injury
curtain shield airbags on both sides work
tem) side airbags and curtain shield air- or being thrown out of the vehicle.
with the seat belts to help reduce injury
bags are designed to provide further For instructions and precautions
by inflating. The SRS curtain shield air-
protection for the driver, front passen- concerning the seat belt system,
bags help reduce injuries mainly to the
ger and second seat passengers in see “Seat belts” on page 50.
driver’s, front passenger’s or second seat
addition to the primary safety protec- passenger’s head and can help the driver,
tion provided by the seat belts. front passenger and second seat passen-
gers to retain inside the vehicle.
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag on the passenger side are activated
even with no passenger in the front seat.
Always wear your seat belt properly.

67
 When you push the roll sensing of curtain
D Do not allow anyone to lean his/her shield airbags off switch for a few sec-
head or any part of his/her body onds with the ignition switch on, the roll
against the door or the area of the sensing of curtain shield airbags off indi-
seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof cator light comes on and the roll sensing
side rail from which the SRS side function is turned off. When you push the
airbag and curtain shield airbag switch again, the indicator light goes off
deploy even if he/she is a child and the roll sensing function is turned on.
seated in the child restraint system.
In a severe side impact, the curtain shield
It is dangerous if the SRS side air-
bag and curtain shield airbag in- airbag on impacted side will inflate even
if the roll sensing function is turned off.
flate, and the impact of the deploy-
ing airbags could cause death or If the ignition switch is turned to “ACC” or
serious injury to the occupant. “LOCK” with the roll sensing function off
and then the ignition switch is turned back
D Improperly seated and/or restrained Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags
infants and children can be killed to “ON”, the roll sensing function will be
off switch
back on automatically.
or seriously injured by the deploy- The roll sensing of curtain shield air-
ing airbags. An infant or child who bags off switch can turn off the curtain
is too small to use a seat belt shield airbags in a vehicle rollover. This
should be properly secured using a switch should only be used in a situa-
child restraint system. Toyota tion where the inflation is not desired
strongly recommends that all in- (such as extreme- off road driving).
fants and children be placed in the
rear seats of the vehicle and prop-
erly restrained. The rear seats are
the safest for infants and children.
For instructions concerning the
installation of a child restraint sys-
tem, see “Child restraint” on page
78.

68
 CAUTION

D Make sure the roll sensing of cur-

tain shield airbags off indicator
light is not on. Collision from the rear
D When the roll sensing of curtain
shield airbags off switch is turned
on (and the roll sensing of curtain
shield airbags off indicator light is
Collision from the front
on), the curtain shield airbags will
not inflate in a vehicle rollover and Vehicle rollover
turning off the curtain shield air-
bags can reduce the occupant
protection which your vehicle safety The SRS side airbags may not activate The SRS side airbags are generally not
systems can provide to you in cer- if the vehicle is subjected to a collision designed to inflate if the vehicle is in-
tain accidents and increase the like- from the side at certain angles, or a volved in a front or rear collision, if it
lihood of death or serious injuries. collision to the side of the vehicle body rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-
other than the passenger compartment speed side collision.
as shown in the illustration.
The SRS side airbags are designed to
inflate when the passenger compartment
area suffers a severe impact from the
side.
Always wear your seat belts properly.

69
 Collision from
the front Collision from
the rear

The angle of Skidding vehicle

vehicle tip- up hitting a curb
is marginal stone Pitch end over end

The curtain shield airbags may not acti- The curtain shield airbags may inflate The curtain shield airbags are generally
vate if the vehicle is subjected to a if the angle of vehicle tip- up is margin- not designed to inflate if the vehicle is
collision from the side at certain al or if the skidding vehicle’s tires hit involved in a front or rear collision, if
angles, or a collision to the side of the a curb stone laterally as shown in the it pitches end over end or if it is in-
vehicle body other than the passenger illustration. volved in a low- speed side collision.
compartment as shown in the illustra-
tion.
The curtain shield airbags are designed to
inflate when the passenger compartment
area suffers a severe impact from the
side or vehicle rollover.
Always wear your seat belts properly.

70
 The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system is controlled by the airbag
sensor assembly. The airbag sensor as-
sembly consists of a safing sensor and
airbag sensor.
Hitting a curb, edge of Falling into or jump- In a severe side impact, the side and
pavement or hard sur- ing over a deep hole 13c538c curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the
face curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the
side airbag inflators and/or the curtain
shield airbag inflators. At this time, a
chemical reaction in the inflators quickly
Landing hard or vehicle falling
fills the airbags with non- toxic gas to help
restrain the lateral motion of the occu-
pants.
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbags may deploy if a severe impact airbag system consists mainly of the fol- In a vehicle rollover, the airbag sensor
assembly triggers the curtain shield airbag
occurs to the underside of your vehicle. lowing components, and their locations are
inflator. At this time, a chemical reaction
Some examples are shown in the il- shown in the illustration.
lustration. in the inflators quickly fills the airbags
1. SRS warning light with non- toxic gas to help restrain the
2. Curtain shield airbag modules lateral motion of front and second seat
(airbag and inflator) occupants.
3. Side airbag modules
(airbag and inflator)
4. Curtain shield airbag sensors
5. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors
6. Airbag sensor assembly

71
When the airbags inflate, they produce a
fairly loud noise and release some smoke CAUTION
and residue along with non- toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This smoke may SRS side airbags and curtain shield
remain inside the vehicle for some time, airbags inflate with considerable
and may cause some minor irritation to force. To reduce the possibility of
the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to death or serious injury when they in- 13c562
wash off any residue as soon as possible flate, the driver, front passenger and
to prevent any potential skin irritation with second seat passengers must:
soap and water. If you can safely exit D Wear their seat belts properly.
from the vehicle, you should do so imme-
D Remain properly seated with their
diately.
backs upright and against the seats
Deployment of the airbags happens in a at all times.
fraction of a second, so the airbags must
inflate with considerable force. While the
D Do not allow anyone to lean against
system is designed to reduce serious inju-
the door when the vehicle is in use,
ries, it may also cause minor burns or
since the side airbag and curtain
abrasions and swelling.
shield airbag could inflate with con-
Front seats as well as parts of the front siderable speed and force. Other-
and rear pillar, front, center and rear gar- wise, he/she may be killed or seri-
nish and roof interior may be hot for sev- ously injured. Special care should
eral minutes, but the airbags themselves be taken especially when you have
will not be hot. The airbags are designed a small child in the vehicle.
to inflate only once.

72
D Sit up straight and well back in the
seat, distributing your weight evenly
in the seat. Do not apply excessive
weight to the outer side of the
seats with a side airbag and to the
front and rear pillar, front, center
and rear garnish and roof interior
13c563
with the curtain shield airbag.
D Improper sitting and wearing of the
seat belts may not retain you inside
the vehicle.

D Make sure the roll sensing of cur- D Do not allow anyone to get his/her
tain shield airbags off indicator is head close to the area where the
not on. The curtain shield airbags side airbag and curtain shield air-
will not inflate in a vehicle rollover bag inflate, since these airbags
if this indicator light is on and you could inflate with considerable
may be killed or seriously injured. speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or serious injured.
Special care should be taken espe-
cially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.

73
D Do not allow anyone to kneel on
the passenger seat, facing the pas-
senger’s side door, since the side
airbag and curtain shield airbag
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken espe-
cially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.

D Do not allow anyone to get his/her D Do not attach a cup holder or any
head or hands out of windows, other device or object on or around
since the curtain shield airbags the door. When the side airbag in-
could inflate with considerable flates, the cup holder or any other
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she device or object will be thrown with
may be killed or seriously injured. great force, or the side airbags may
Special care should be taken espe- not activate correctly, resulting in
cially when you have a small child death or serious injury. Likewise,
in the vehicle. the driver and front passenger
should not hold objects in their
arms or on their knees.

74
 D Do not hook a hanger, heavy or D Do not disassemble or repair the
sharp pointed objects on the coat front and rear pillars and roof side
hook. If the curtain shield airbags rails containing the curtain shield
inflate, those items will be thrown airbags. Such changes may disable
away with great force or the curtain the system or cause the curtain
shield airbags may not activate cor- shield airbags to inflate accidental-
13c800b rectly, resulting in death or serious ly, resulting in death or serious in-
injury. When you hang clothes, jury.
hang them on the coat hook direct- D Do not modify or change the sus-
ly. pension system. Such changes may
D Do not use seat accessories which cause the curtain shield airbags to
cover the parts where the side air- inflate accidentally, resulting in
bags inflate. Such accessories may death or serious injury.
prevent the side airbags from acti- D Do not use tires or wheels other
D Do not attach a microphone or any vating correctly, causing death or than the manufacturer’s recom-
other device or object around the serious injury.
area where the curtain shield airbag mended size. Such a use may cause
activates such as on the windshield D Do not modify or replace the seats the curtain shield airbags to inflate
or upholstery of the seats with side accidentally, resulting in death or
glass, side door glass, front, center
and roof side garnish, roof interior airbags. Such changes may prevent serious injury. For details, see
or assist grips. When the curtain the side airbag system from activat- “Checking and replacing tires” on
ing correctly, disable the system or page 323.
shield airbag inflates, the micro-
phone or other device or object will cause the side airbags to inflate ac-
be thrown away with great force or cidentally, resulting in death or seri-
ous injury.
the curtain shield airbag may not
activate correctly, resulting in death
or serious injury.

75
D Do not place luggage heavier than NOTICE
specified on the roof luggage carri-
Do not perform any of the following
er. Such luggage may cause the
changes without consulting your
curtain shield airbags to inflate ac-
Toyota dealer. Such changes can in-
cidentally, resulting in death or seri-
terfere with proper operation of the
ous injury. For details, see “Roof
SRS side airbag and curtain shield
luggage carrier” on page 218.
airbag system in some cases.
Failure to follow these instructions
z Installation of electronic devices
can result in death or serious injury.
such as a mobile two- way radio,
Consult your Toyota dealer about any
cassette tape player or compact
repair and modification.
disc player.
z Modification of the side structure of
the passenger compartment. The indicator comes on when the igni-
z Repairs made on or near the con- tion key is turned to the “ON” position.
sole or front seat. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags are operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-
sors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor
assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor
assemblies, driver’s seat position sensor,
driver’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt
pretensioner assemblies, inflators, roll
sensing of curtain shield airbags off indi-
cator light, interconnecting wiring and pow-
er sources. (For details, see “Service re-
minder indicators and warning buzzers” on
page 124.)

76
If any of the following conditions occurs, In the following cases, contact your Toyota
this indicates a malfunction of the airbags dealer as soon as possible:
or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your D Any of the SRS side airbags and cur-
Toyota dealer as soon as possible. tain shield airbags have been inflated.
D The light does not come on when the D The portion of the doors (shaded in the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi- illustration) was involved in an accident
tion or remains on for more than 6 that was not severe enough to cause
seconds or flashes. the SRS side airbags and curtain
D The light comes on or starts flashing shield airbags to inflate.
while driving. D The surface of the seats with the side
airbag (shaded in the illustration) is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-
aged.
D The portion of the front, center and
rear garnish, or roof interior containing
the curtain shield airbags inside
(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.

77
Child restraint—
—Child restraint precautions
Toyota strongly urges the use of ap-
propriate child restraint systems for D Toyota strongly urges use of a D On vehicle with side airbags and
children. proper child restraint system which curtain shield airbags, do not allow
conforms to the size of the child, the child to lean his/her head or
The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A. installed on the rear seat. Accord- any part of his/her body against the
now require the use of a child restraint
ing to accident statistics, the child door or the area of the seat, front
system.
is safer when properly restrained in or rear pillar, front, center or rear
Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819. the rear seat than in the front seat. garnish or roof interior from which
If a child is too large for a child restraint D Never install a rear- facing child re- the side airbags or curtain shield
system, the child should sit in the rear straint system on the front passen- airbags deploy even if the child is
seat and must be restrained using the ger seat. In the event of an acci- seated in the child restraint system.
vehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” on dent, the force of the rapid inflation It is dangerous if the side airbag
page 50 for details. of the front passenger airbag can and curtain shield airbag inflate,
cause death or serious injury to the and the impact could cause death
CAUTION child if the rear- facing child re- or serious injury to the child.
straint system is installed on the D Do not use the seat belt extender
D For effective protection in automo- front passenger seat. when installing a child restraint
bile accidents and sudden stops, a D A forward- facing child restraint sys- system on the front or rear passen-
child must be properly restrained, tem should be allowed to be ger seat. If installing a child re-
using a seat belt or child restraint installed on the front passenger straint system with the seat belt
system depending on the age and seat only when it is unavoidable. extender connected to the seat belt,
size of the child. Holding a child in Always move the seat as far back the seat belt will not securely hold
your arms is not a substitute for a as possible, because the front pas- the child restraint system, which
child restraint system. In an acci- senger airbag could inflate with could cause death or serious injury
dent, the child can be crushed considerable speed and force. to the child or other passengers in
against the windshield, or between Otherwise, the child may be killed the event of collision.
you and the vehicle’s interior. or seriously injured.

78
 —Types of child restraint
—Child restraint system system
A child restraint system for a small Child restraint systems are classified into
D Make sure you have complied with child or baby must itself be properly the following 3 types depending on the
all installation instructions provided restrained on the seat with the lap por- child’s age and size.
by the child restraint manufacturer tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must
and that the system is properly se- (A) Infant seat
carefully consult the manufacturer’s (B) Convertible seat
cured. It is not secured properly, it instructions which accompany the child (C) Booster seat
may cause death or serious injury restraint system.
to the child in the event of a stop Install the child restraint system following
To provide proper restraint, use a child the instructions provided by its manufac-
or accident.
restraint system following the manufactur- turer.
er’s instructions about the appropriate age
and size of the child for the child restraint Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-
system. curing the top strap of a child restraint
system. For instructions about how to use
Install the child restraint system correctly the anchor bracket, see “Using a top
following the instructions provided by its strap” on page 94.
manufacturer. General directions are also
provided under the following illustrations. Child restraint lower anchorages approved
for your vehicle may also be used. See
The child restraint system should be “Installation with child restraint lower an-
installed on the rear seat. According to chorages” on page 96.
accident statistics, the child is safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than
in the front seat.
When not using the child restraint system,
keep it secured with the seat belt or place
it somewhere other than the passenger
compartment. This will prevent it from in-
juring passengers in the event of a sud-
den stop or accident.

79
 —Installation with 2- point
type seat belt

(A) Infant seat (C) Booster seat

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION
An infant seat must be used in rear-
facing position only.

(B) Convertible seat

80
 CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap portion of the belt is
not twisted.
D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
D If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
1. Run the center lap belt through or Contact your Toyota dealer
CAUTION around the infant seat following the immediately. Do not install the child
instructions provided by its manufactur- restraint system on the seat until
Do not install a child restraint system er and insert the tab into the buckle the seat belt is fixed.
on the third seat if it interferes with taking care not to twist the lap belt.
the lock mechanism of the second
seats. Otherwise, the child or second
seat occupant(s) may be killed or se-
riously injured in case of sudden
braking or a collision.

81
2. While pressing the infant seat firmly 3. To remove the infant seat, press the
against the seat cushion and seatback, CAUTION buckle release button.
tighten the lap belt by pulling its free
end to hold the infant seat securely. Push and pull the child restraint sys-
tem in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instruction provided by its manufac-
turer.

82
(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION 1. Run the center lap belt through or
CAUTION around the convertible seat following
A convertible seat must be used in for-
ward- facing or rear- facing position de- the instructions provided by its
Do not install a child restraint system manufacturer and insert the tab into
pending on the age and size of the
on the third seat if it interferes with the buckle taking care not to twist the
child. When installing, follow the the lock mechanism of the second
manufacturer’s instruction about the ap- lap belt.
seats. Otherwise, the child or second
plicable age and size of the child as
seat occupant(s) may be killed or se-
well as directions for installing the riously injured in case of sudden
child restraint system. braking or a collision.

83
 CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap portion of the belt is
not twisted.
D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
D If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer 2. While pressing the convertible seat
firmly against the seat cushion and CAUTION
immediately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until seatback, tighten the lap belt by pulling
its free end to hold the convertible seat Push and pull the child restraint sys-
the seat belt is fixed.
securely. tem in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufac-
turer.

84
 —Installation with 3- point
type seat belt

13c564 13c565

3. To remove the convertible seat, press (A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

the buckle release button. CAUTION
An infant seat must be used in rear-
facing position only. D Never install a rear- facing child re-
straint system on the front passen-
ger seat. In the event of an acci-
dents, the force of the rapid infla-
tion of the front passenger airbag
can cause death or serious injury
to the child if the rear- facing child
restraint system is installed on the
front passenger seat.

85
 CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.
D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
D If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through Contact your Toyota dealer
D Do not install a child restraint sys- or around the infant seat following the
tem on the third seat if it interferes immediately. Do not install the child
instructions provided by its manufactur- restraint system on the seat until
with the lock mechanism of the sec- er and insert the tab into the buckle
ond seats. Otherwise, the child or the seat belt is fixed.
taking care not to twist the belt. Keep
second seat occupant(s) may be the lap portion of the belt tight.
killed or seriously injured in case
of sudden braking or a collision.
D If the driver’s seat position does
not allow sufficient space for safe
installation, install the child re-
straint system on the second right
seat.

86
2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it 3. While pressing the infant seat firmly
in the lock mode. When the belt is against the seat cushion and seatback, CAUTION
then retracted even slightly, it cannot let the shoulder belt retract as far as
be extended. it will go to hold the infant seat secure- Push and pull the child restraint sys-
ly. tem in different directions to be sure
To hold the infant seat securely, make it is secure. Follow all the installation
sure the belt is in the lock mode before instructions provided by its manufac-
letting the belt retract.
turer.

87
 13c566
13c567

4. To remove the infant seat, press the (B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION
buckle release button and allow the CAUTION
A convertible seat must be used in for-
belt to retract completely. The belt will ward- facing or rear- facing position de-
move freely again and be ready to D Never install a rear- facing child re-
pending on the age and size of the
work for an adult or older child passen- straint system on the front passen-
child. When installing, follow the ger seat. In the event of an acci-
ger. manufacturer’s instructions about the dent, the force of the rapid inflation
appropriate age and size of the child as
of the front passenger airbag can
well as directions for installing the cause death or serious injury to the
child restraint system. child if the rear- facing child re-
straint system is installed on the
front passenger seat.

88
 D On vehicle with side airbags and
curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean his/her head or
any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front
13c568 or rear pillar, front, center or rear
garnish or roof interior from which 13c501b
the side airbags or curtain shield
airbags deploy even if the child is
seated in a child restraint system.
It is dangerous if the side airbag
Move seat fully back and curtain shield airbag inflate,
and the impact could cause death
or serious injury to the child.
D A forward- facing child restraint sys- D Do not install a child restraint sys-
tem should be allowed to be tem on the third seat if it interferes
installed on the front passenger with the lock mechanism of the sec-
seat only when it is unavoidable. ond seats. Otherwise, the child or
Always move the seat as far back second seat occupant(s) may be
as possible, because the front pas- killed or serious injured in case of
senger airbag could inflate with sudden braking or a collision.
considerable speed and force. D If the driver’s seat position does
Otherwise, the child may be killed not allow sufficient space for safe
or seriously injured. installation, install the child re-
straint system on the second right
seat.

89
 CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.
D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
D If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through Contact your Toyota dealer 2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
or around the convertible seat following immediately. Do not install the child in the lock mode. When the belt is
the instructions provided by its restraint system on the seat until then retracted even slightly, it cannot
manufacturer and insert the tab into the seat belt is fixed. be extended.
the buckle taking care not to twist the To hold the convertible seat securely,
belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt make sure the belt is in the lock mode
tight. before letting the belt retract.

90
3. While pressing the convertible seat 4. To remove the convertible seat, press
firmly against the seat cushion and CAUTION the buckle release button and allow the
seatback, let the shoulder belt retract belt to retract completely. The belt will
as far as it will go to hold the convert- Push and pull the child restraint sys- move freely again and be ready to
ible seat securely. tem in different directions to be sure work for an adult or older child passen-
it is secure. Follow all the installation ger.
instructions provided by its manufac-
turer.

91
 D On vehicle with side airbags and
curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean his/her head or
any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front
or rear pillar, front, center or rear
13c569 garnish or roof interior from which
13c570
the side airbags or curtain shield
airbags deploy even if the child is
seated in a child restraint system.
It is dangerous if the side airbag
Move seat fully back and curtain shield airbag inflate,
and the impact could cause death
(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION or serious injury to the child.
CAUTION
A booster seat must be used in for-
ward- facing position only. D A forward- facing child restraint sys-
tem should be allowed to be
installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back
as possible, because the front pas-
senger airbag could inflate with
considerable speed and force.
Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured.

92
 CAUTION D If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
D Always make sure the shoulder belt child from death or serious injury.
is positioned across the center of Contact your Toyota dealer
child’s shoulder. The belt should be immediately. Do not install the child
kept away from child’s neck, but restraint system on the seat until
not falling off child’s shoulder. the seat belt is fixed.
Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sud-
den braking or a collision.
D Both high- positioned lap belts and
loose- fitting belts could cause
death or serious injuries due to
1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run sliding under the lap belt during a
the lap and shoulder belt through or collision or other unintended event.
around the booster seat and across the Keep the lap belt positioned as low
child following the instructions provided on child’s hips as possible.
by its manufacturer and insert the tab D For child’s safety, do not place the
into the buckle taking care not to twist shoulder belt under child’s arm.
the belt.
D After inserting the tab, make sure
Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly the tab and buckle are locked and
across the child’s shoulder and that the that the lap and shoulder portions
lap belt is positioned as low as possible of the belt are not twisted.
on the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on
page 50 for details. D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

93
 —Using a top strap

Symbol

13C001
Anchor
brackets

2. To remove the booster seat, press the Follow the procedure below for a child Use the anchor bracket located behind the
buckle release button and allow the restraint system that requires the use second seat on the floor to attach the top
belt to retract. of a top strap. strap.
Anchor brackets are installed for each
second seating position.
This symbol indicates the locations of the
anchor bracket.

94
 13C003 13C004 13C005

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET: 2. Fix the child restraint system with 4. Replace the head restraint.
1. Remove the head restraint. the seat belt.
3. Take off the cover, latch the hook
onto the anchor bracket and tighten
the top strap.
For instructions to install the child re-
straint system, see “Child restraint—” on
page 78.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securely

latched, and check that the child re-
straint system is secure by pushing
and pulling it in different directions.
Follow all installation instructions
provided by its manufacturer.

95
—Installation with child
restraint lower anchorages

13C529 13c571
Most upright
13C532f
position

The lower anchorages for the child re- CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLA- 2. Take off the cover between the seat
straint system interfaced with the TION cushion and seatback and confirm
FMVSS225 specification are installed in 1. Fold down the seatback and back to the position of the lower anchorages
the second seat. the most upright position until it below the symbol in the seat back.
The anchorages are installed in the clear- locks into place.
ance between the seat cushion and seat-
back of left and center second seats.
Child restraint system interfaced with the
FMVSS213 specification can be fixed with
these anchorages. In this case, it is not
necessary to fix the child restraint system
with a seat belt on the vehicle.

96
 3. Type A—Latch the hooks of lower
straps onto the anchorages and CAUTION
tighten the lower straps.
D When using the lower anchorages
Type B—Latch the buckles onto the
for the child restraint system, be
anchorages
sure that there are no irregular ob-
If your child restraint system has a top
13C009b strap, it should be anchored. (For the
jects around the anchorages or that
the seat belt is not caught.
installation of the top strap, see “—Using
D Push and pull the child restraint
a top strap” on page 94.)
system in different directions to be
For installation details, refer to the instruc- sure it is secure. Follow all the
tion manual equipped with each product. installation instructions provided by
its manufacturer.
Type A D Do not install a child restraint sys-
tem on the rear seat if it interferes
with the lock mechanism of the
front seats. Otherwise, the child or
front seat occupant(s) may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sud-
den braking or a collision.

13C008b

Type B

97
98
 SECTION 1- 4
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Steering wheel and Mirrors
Power tilt and telescopic steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Anti- glare inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

99
Power tilt and telescopic steer-
ing wheel

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering column

while the vehicle is moving. Doing so
may cause the driver to mishandle
the vehicle and an accident may oc-
cur resulting in death or serious inju-
ries.

ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT OF TELESCOPIC STEER-

TILT ING COLUMN
To adjust the tilt of the steering wheel, To adjust the steering column length,
push the control switch upward or push the control switch forward or
downward to set it to the desired posi- backward to set the steering wheel to
tion. the desired position.
When the ignition key is removed, the
CAUTION steering column moves forward away from
the driver and also tilts up for easy exit
Do not adjust the steering wheel and entry.
while the vehicle is moving. Doing so
When the key is inserted into the ignition
may cause the driver to mishandle
switch, the steering column returns to the
the vehicle and an accident may oc-
previously set position.
cur resulting in death or serious inju-
ries. This feature can be set inoperative. Ask
your Toyota dealer.

100
 —Power rear view mirror
Outside rear view mirrors— control

CAUTION

D Do not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the
vehicle and an accident may occur
resulting in death or serious inju-
ries.
D Since the mirror surfaces can get
hot, do not touch them when the
mirror heater switch is on.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just To adjust a mirror, use the switches.
see the side of your vehicle in the mir- 1. Master switch—To select the mirror to
ror. be adjusted
Be careful when judging the size or dis- Place the switch at “L” (left) or “R”
tance of any object seen in the outside (right).
rear view mirror on the passenger’s side 2. Control switch—To move the mirror
because it is a convex mirror. Any object Push the switch in the desired direc-
seen in a convex mirror will look smaller tion.
and farther away than when seen in a flat
mirror. Mirrors can be adjusted when the key is
in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
When you push the outside rear view mir-
ror heater switch, the heater panels in the
outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear
the mirror surface. (See “Outside rear
view mirror heaters” on page 117.)

101
 Anti- glare inside rear view
—Folding rear view mirrors mirror—
NOTICE
If ice should jam the mirror, do not
operate the control or scrape the mir-
ror face. Use a spray de- icer to free
the mirror.
13C010b

The rear view mirrors can be folded Adjust the mirror so that you can just
backward for parking in compact areas. see the rear of your vehicle in the mir-
To fold the rear view mirror, push back- ror.
ward. Pushing the switch changes the mode
between “AUTO” and “DAY”.
CAUTION The indicator comes on when the “AUTO”
mode is selected.
Do not drive with the mirrors folded
“DAY” mode: The mirror surface is nor-
backward. Both the driver and pas-
mal.
senger side rear view mirrors must
be extended and properly adjusted “AUTO” mode: If the mirror detects
before driving. light from the headlights of the vehicle
behind you, the mirror surface darkens
slightly to reduce the reflected light.

102
 —Compass (vehicles without
navigation system)
When the ignition key is inserted and
turned on, the inside rear view mirror al-
ways turns on in the “AUTO” mode.
When the inside air temperature is low, it
may take a little longer for the mirror to
darken in response to the detection of
headlights. 13c570b 13c013
CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the ve-
hicle and an accident may occur re-
sulting in death or serious injuries. To ensure correct functioning of anti- glare The compass indicates the direction in
mirror sensors located on both sides of which the vehicle is heading. The illustra-
the mirror, do not touch or cover the sen- tion shown above indicates the vehicle is
sors with your finger or a piece of cloth, heading north.
etc.
Displays Directions
N North
NE Northeast
E East
SE Southeast
S South
SW Southwest
W West
NW Northwest

103
Pushing the “AUTO” button for longer
NOTICE
3 seconds turns on or off the compass
display. Do not put magnets or a metal object
The compass may not show the correct near the inside rear view mirror. Do-
direction in the following conditions: ing this may cause malfunction of the
compass sensor.
D The vehicle is stopped immediately af-
ter turning. The compass does not ad-
just while the vehicle is stopped. CALIBRATING THE COMPASS
(deviation calibration)
D The ignition switch is turned off imme-
diately after turning. The direction display on the compass
D The vehicle is on an inclined surface. deviates from the true direction deter-
mined by the earth’s magnetic field, The
D The vehicle is in a place where the amount of deviation varies according to
earth’s magnetic field is subject to in- the geographic position of the vehicle.
terference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel To adjust for this deviation, stop the ve-
tower, between buildings, roof parking, hicle and push the button for longer than
near a crossing, near a large vehicle, about 6 seconds until the number (1- 15)
etc.). appears on the display. Then push the
button again, referring to the following
D The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a map to select the number of the zone
magnet or a metal object on or near where the vehicle is.
the inside rear view mirror.)
D The battery has been disconnected.
D Any door is open.
If the deviation is small, the compass
works to calibrate the direction automati-
cally while the vehicle is in motion.
For obtaining additional precision or for
complete calibrating, see “Calibrating the
compass” below.
104
 If the direction is displayed several sec-
onds after adjustment, the calibration is
finished.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while the

vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.

13C015b

Zone number L Hawaii is included in zone 6.

105
 D Do not perform circling calibration of
the compass in a place where the
earth’s magnetic field is subject to in-
terference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel
tower, between buildings, roof parking,
near a crossing, near a large vehicle,
13c011a 13C012 etc.).
D During calibration, do not operate elec-
tric systems (moon roof, power win-
dows, etc.) as they may interfere with
the calibration.

CAUTION
CALIBRATING THE COMPASS Drive the vehicle slowly (at 8km/h (5mph)
(circling calibration) or lower) in a circle until the direction is D When doing the circling calibration,
“C” appears on the display in case the displayed. If there is not enough space to be sure to secure a wide space,
circling calibration is required due to a drive in a circle, drive around the block and watch out for people and ve-
drastic change in the magnetic field. To until the direction is displayed. hicles in the neighborhood. Do not
rectify this, follow the calibration proce- After driving in 1 to 3 circles in the above violate any local traffic rules while
dure below. method, calibration is complete with the performing circling calibration.
direction shown on the display. D Do not adjust the display while the
If calibration cannot be performed because vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
of the magnetized vehicle, etc., take your the display only when the vehicle is
vehicle to Toyota dealer. stopped.

106
Sun visors— —Vanity mirror

To block out glare, move the sun visor. To block the glare from the front when the To use the vanity mirror, swing down
To block out glare from the front—Swing main sun visor is swung down, swing the main sun visor and open the cover.
down the main sun visor. down the second sun visor. The vanity light comes on when you open
To block out glare from the side—Swing the cover.
CAUTION
down the main sun visor, remove it from
the hook and swing it to the lateral side. Slide the main sun visor only when
You can adjust its position as shown. it is swung down to the lateral side.
It can cover the anti- glare inside rear
view mirror and obstruct the rear
view.

107
108
 SECTION 1- 5
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Lights, Wipers and Defogger
Headlight and turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Emergency flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Front fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Ignition switch light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Windshield wipers and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Rear window wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Outside rear view mirror heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

109
Headlight and turn signals
Manually twist the knob to the position 2
to turn on the headlights if they are need-
ed immediately when entering a dark tun-
nel, parking structure, etc.
NOTE: *The operating condition or sensi-
tivity can be changed. Ask your Toyota
dealer for details.

HEADLIGHTS The automatic light control sensor is on

To turn on the following lights: Twist the top of the passenger’s side instrument
the headlight/turn signal lever knob. panel.
Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate, Do not place anything on the instrument
side marker and instrument panel lights panel, and/or do not affix anything on the
windshield to block this sensor.
However, if the surroundings are bright
and if the instrument panel light control When the headlights come on, the lights
automatically turn off about 30 seconds
dial is not turned fully on, the instrument
after any of the doors is opened and
panel lights do not come on.
closed with the ignition key turned to the
Position 2—Headlights and all of the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.* To turn them
above on again, turn the ignition key to the ”ON”
position, or turn the headlight switch off
Position 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and/or all and then twist the knob until the first or
of the lights in position 1 second clickstop. If you are going to park
They automatically turn on or off depend- for over one week, make sure the head-
ing on the darkness of the surroundings.* light switch is off.

110
When the headlight switch is on with all
the doors locked, pushing the “LOCK” but-
ton on the wireless remote control key
turns off the headlights.
NOTE: *The time before turning off the
lights can be changed. Ask your Toyota
dealer for details.

NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the lights on
for a long period when the engine is
not running.

Daytime running light system High- Low beams—For high beams, turn TURN SIGNALS
the headlights on and push the lever away To signal a turn, push the headlight/
The headlights turn on at reduced intensi- from you (position 1). Pull the lever to-
ty when the parking brake is released with turn signal lever up or down to position
ward you (position 2) for low beams. 1.
the engine started, even with the light
switch in the “OFF” position. They will not The headlight high beam indicator light The key must be in the “ON” position.
go off until the ignition switch is turned (blue light) on the instrument panel will
tell you that the high beams are on. The lever automatically returns after you
off. make a turn, but you may have to return
To turn on the other exterior lights and Flashing the high beam headlights it by hand after you change lanes.
instrument panel lights, twist the knob to (position 3)—Pull the lever all the way
back. The high beam headlights turn off To signal a lane change, move the lever
the position 1. up or down to the pressure point (position
when you release the lever.
Twist the knob to the position 2 to turn 2) and hold it.
the headlights to full intensity for driving You can flash the high beam headlights
with the knob turned to “OFF”. If the turn signal indicator lights (green
at night. lights) on the instrument panel flash faster
than normal, a front or rear turn signal
bulb is burned out. See “Replacing light
bulbs” on page 333.
111
Emergency flashers Instrument panel light control
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the switch on
longer than necessary when the en-
gine is not running.

To turn on the emergency flashers, To adjust the brightness of the instru-

push the switch. ment panel lights, turn the dial.
All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn
them off, push the switch once again.
Turn on the emergency flashers to warn
other drivers if your vehicle must be
stopped where it might be a traffic hazard.
Always pull your vehicle as far off the
road as possible.
The turn signal light switch will not work
when the emergency flashers are operat-
ing.

112
Front fog lights Interior lights
To turn on the interior light, slide the
switch.
The interior light switch has the following
positions:
“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.
“OFF”—Turns the light off.
“DOOR”—
—Center: Turn the light on when any of
side doors and back door are opened.
—Rear: Turn the light on when any of the
rear side doors and back door are
opened.
Center
To turn on the front fog lights, twist
the band of the headlight/turn signal
lever. They will come on only when the
headlights are on low beam.

Rear

113
 Personal lights
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM INTERIOR LIGHTS CUT OFF OPERATION
Center— When the ignition switch is “OFF” and any
With the switch in the “DOOR” position, interior lights in the vehicle stay lighting
the light comes on when either side or on, the lights will cut off automatically
back door is opened. After all the doors after 30 minutes.
are closed, the light remains on for a You can cancel the cut off operation by:
certain time and then goes out.*
D Turning the key to the “ACC” position.
However, in the following cases, the light
goes out immediately: D Opening or closing any of side doors
and back door.
D All the doors are closed when the igni-
tion key is in “ACC” or “ON” position. All the lights are cut off when any of the
doors are locked or unlocked by key or
D The ignition key is turned to “ACC”, wireless remote control key.
“ON” or “START” when the light is still Front
on.
D All the doors are locked when the light
is still on.
D One front door will be closed with the
lock knob pushed forward while the
other doors are locked.
NOTE: *The interior lights can be set not
to come on or the duration of lighting can
be changed. Ask your Toyota dealer for
details.

Center

114
 Ignition switch light Windshield wipers and washer
To turn on the personal light, push the
switch on 1 side. To turn the lights off,
push the switch on 2 side.
PERSONAL LIGHTS CUT OFF OPERA-
TION
When the ignition switch is “OFF” and any
personal lights in the vehicle stay lighting
on, the lights will cut off automatically
after 30 minutes.
You can cancel the cut off operation by:
D Turning the key to the “ACC” position.
D Opening or closing any of side doors
and back door.
For easy access to the ignition switch, To turn on the windshield wipers, move
All the lights are cut off when any of the the ignition switch light comes on when the lever to the desired setting.
doors are locked or unlocked by key or any door is opened. The key must be in the “ON” position.
wireless remote control key.
The light remains on for a certain time There are 3 settings:
after all the doors are closed.
1. “INT” position: Intermittent operation
It goes off immediately when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ACC” position or 2. “LO” position: Low speed operation
when all the doors are locked. 3. “HI” position: High speed operation
Twist the interval adjuster upward to in-
crease the wiping time interval between
sweeps, and downward to decrease it.

115
 Rear window wiper and washer
To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever
NOTICE
toward you.
If the windshield wipers are off, they will Do not operate the rear wiper if the
operate a couple of times after the washer rear window is dry. It may scratch the
squirts. glass.
For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 333.
In freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before using the washer.
This will help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing on your windshield, which
can block your vision.

NOTICE To turn on the rear window wiper, twist

the lever knob upward.
Do not operate the wipers if the wind-
shield is dry. It may scratch the The key must be in the “ON” position.
glass. There are 2 settings:
1. “LO” position: Intermittent operation
When waxing your vehicle, make sure that
the washer nozzles do not become 2. “HI” position: Normal operation
blocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked, To squirt washer fluid on the rear window,
contact your Toyota dealer to have the twist the knob upward or downward as far
vehicle serviced. as it will go (position 3 or 4). The knob
automatically returns from these positions
NOTICE after you release it.
If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not For instructions on adding washer fluid,
try to clear it with a pin or other see “Adding washer fluid” on page 333.
object. The nozzle will be damaged.

116
Rear window defogger Outside rear view mirror heaters
Make sure you turn the defogger off when
the surfaces are clear. Leaving the defog-
ger on for a long time could cause the
battery to discharge, especially during
stop- and- go driving. The defogger is not
designed for drying rain water or for melt-
ing snow.

NOTICE
z When cleaning the inside of the
rear window, be careful not to
scratch or damage the heater wires
or connectors.
To defog or defrost the rear window, z To prevent the battery from being To defog or defrost the outside rear
push the switch. discharged, turn the switch off view mirrors, push the switch.
when the engine is not running.
The key must be in the “ON” position. The key must be in the “ON” position.
The thin heater wires on the inside of the The heater panels in the outside rear view
rear window will quickly clear the surface. mirrors will quickly clear the surfaces. An
An indicator light will illuminate to indicate indicator light will illuminate to indicate the
the defogger is operating. mirror heaters are operating.
Push the switch once again to turn the Push the switch once again to turn the
defogger off. defoggers off.
The system will automatically shut off af- The system will automatically shut off af-
ter the defogger has operated about 15 ter the mirror heaters have operated about
minutes. 15 minutes.

117
 CAUTION

Since the mirror surfaces can get hot,

do not touch them when the mirror
heater switch is on.

Make sure you turn the mirror heaters off

when the surfaces are clear. Leaving the
mirror heaters on for a long time could
cause the battery to discharge, especially
during stop- and- go driving. The mirror
heaters are not designed for drying rain
water or for melting snow.
If the outside rear view mirrors are heavi-
ly coated with ice, use a spray de- icer
before operating the switch.

NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, turn the switch off when the
engine is not running.

118
 SECTION 1- 7
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Ignition switch, Transmission and Parking brake
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Four–wheel drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Active traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Vehicle stability control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Active height control suspension (AHC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Skyhook TEMS (Skyhook Toyota electronic modulated suspension) .
166

135
Ignition switch
“ACC”—Accessories such as the radio Several hours after the engine is turned
operate, but the engine is off. off, you may hear a sound coming from
If you leave the key in the “ACC” or underneath the luggage compartment for
“LOCK” position and open the driver’s several minutes. This is normal operation
door, a buzzer will remind you to remove and does not indicate a malfunction. (See
the key. page ix.)

“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steering NOTICE

wheel is locked. The key can be re-
moved only at this position. Do not leave the key in the “ON”
position if the engine is not running.
To turn the key from “ACC” to the “LOCK”
The battery will discharge and the
position, you must put the selector lever
electronic ignition system could be
in the “P” position.
damaged.
Once you remove the key, the engine im-
“START”—Starter motor on. The key mobilizer system is automatically set. (See
will return to the “ON” position when “Engine immobilizer system” on page 12.)
released.
When starting the engine, the key may
For starting tips, see page 252. seem stuck at the “LOCK” position. To
“ON”—Engine on and all accessories free it, first be sure the key is pushed all
on. the way in, and then rock the steering
wheel slightly while turning the key gently.
This is the normal driving position.
It is not a malfunction if the needles on
all meters and gauges more slightly when
the key is turned to the “ACC” or “START”
position.

136
 Automatic transmission
Selector lever position

P: Parking, engine starting and key removal position

R: Reverse position
N: Neutral position
D: Normal driving position (Shifting into overdrive position)
4: Position for engine braking (Shifting into overdrive not possible)
3,2: Position for more powerful engine braking
L: Position for maximum engine braking

 The shift position is displayed on the instrument cluster

Driving pattern selector button for selecting a driving pattern suited to existing driving
conditions

“PWR” (power) mode for powerful acceleration

This indicator lights on the instrument panel

Normal mode for general driving condition

Second start mode selector button for selecting either second start mode or normal driving mode

Second start mode

This indicator lights on the instrument panel in the second
 Shift while pressing the brake pedal.
start mode
(Ignition switch must be in the “ON” posi-
tion)

 When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from “D” to “4”, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control
is not cancelled. For ways to decrease the vehicle speed, see “Cruise control” on page 155.

137
Your automatic transmission has a shift 3. Release the parking brake and brake  Shift into the “L” position. The trans-
lock system to minimize the possibility of pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal mission will downshift to first gear
incorrect operation. This means you can slowly for smooth starting. when the vehicle speed drops down to
only shift out of “P” position when the (b) Using engine braking or lower than following speed for “L”
brake pedal is depressed with the ignition position and maximum engine braking
switch in “ON” position. To use engine braking, you can downshift will be enabled.
(a) Normal driving the transmission as follows:
Four –wheel drive control lever
1. Start the engine as instructed in “How
 Shift into the “4” position. The trans- in “H” . . . . . . . . . . . 37 km/h (23 mph)
mission will downshift to fourth gear
to start the engine” on page 252. The Four –wheel drive control lever
transmission must be in “P” or “N”. and engine braking will be enabled.
in “L” . . . . . . . . . . . 14 km/h (9 mph)
2. With your foot holding down the brake
 Shift into the “3” position. The trans-
mission will downshift to third gear When the cruise control is being used,
pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”. even if you downshift from “D” to “4”,
when the vehicle speed drops down to
When the lever is in the “D” position, the or lower than following speed for third engine braking will not be enabled be-
automatic transmission system will select gear, and more powerful engine braking cause the cruise control is not cancelled.
the most suitable gear for running condi- will be enabled. For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,
tions such as normal cruising, hill climb- see “Cruise control” on page 155.
ing, hard towing, etc. Four –wheel drive control lever
in “H” . . . . . . . . . . . 129 km/h (80 mph)
Always use the “D” position for better fuel CAUTION
Four –wheel drive control lever
economy and quieter driving. If the engine
coolant temperature is low, the transmis- in “L” . . . . . . . . . . . 51 km/h (32 mph) Be careful when downshifting on a
sion will not shift into the overdrive gear  Shift into the “2” position. The trans- slippery surface. Abrupt shifting
even in the “D” position. mission will downshift to second gear could cause the vehicle to skid or
when the vehicle speed drops down to spin.
CAUTION or lower than following speed for sec-
ond gear, and more powerful engine
Never put your foot on the accelera- braking will be enabled.
tor pedal while shifting. Four –wheel drive control lever
in “H” . . . . . . . . . . . 88 km/h (55 mph)
Four –wheel drive control lever
in “L” . . . . . . . . . . . 35 km/h (22 mph)
138
(c) Using “3”, “2” and “L” positions (d) Backing up
NOTICE
The “3”, “2” and “L” positions are used for 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
strong engine braking as described pre- z Be careful not to over-rev the en-
2. With the brake pedal held down with
viously. gine. Watch the tachometer to keep
your foot, shift the selector lever to the
engine rpm from going into the red
With the selector lever in “3”, “2” or “L”, “R” position.
zone. The approximate maximum al-
you can start the vehicle in motion as
lowable speed for each position is NOTICE
with the lever in “D”.
given below for your reference:
With the selector lever in “3” and “2”, the Never shift into reverse while the ve-
km/h (mph)
vehicle will start in first gear and automat- hicle is moving.
Transmission Transfer
ically shift to third or second gear.
H L
With the selector lever in “L”, the trans- 4 . . . . . . . 178 (111) 72 (45)
mission is engaged in first gear. 3 . . . . . . . 127 (79) 52 (32)
2 . . . . . . . 87 (54) 36 (22)
L . . . . . . . 51 (32) 20 (12)
z Do not continue hill climbing or
hard towing for a long time in the
“3”, “2” or “L” position. This may
cause severe automatic transmis-
sion damage from overheating. To
prevent such damage, “4” position
should be used in hill climbing or
hard towing.

139
(e) Parking (f) Good driving practice (g) Driving in “PWR” (Power) mode
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.  If the transmission repeatedly shifts up In the “PWR” mode, the transmission is
2. Pull the parking brake lever up fully to and down between fourth gear and ov- shifted up and down at a higher vehicle
securely apply the parking brake. erdrive gears when climbing a gentle speed than in the Normal mode and a
slope, shift the selector lever to the “4” more powerful acceleration is achieved. To
3. With the brake pedal pressed down, position. Be sure to shift the selector set the “PWR” mode, push in the driving
shift the selector lever to the “P” posi- lever to the “D” position immediately pattern selector button. The “PWR” mode
tion. afterward. indicator light comes on.
If the four–wheel drive control is in the  When towing a trailer, in order to main- For ordinary driving, Toyota recommends
“N” position while the selector lever is in tain engine braking efficiency, do not using the Normal mode to improve fuel
the “P” position, the transmission will use overdrive. economy.
damage and the wheels will not lock.
(h) Driving in “2nd STRT” (second
CAUTION start) mode
CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake In the “2nd STRT” (Second start) mode,
While the vehicle is moving, never the transmission system shifts up from
pedal while stopped with the engine
attempt to move the selector lever second gear. Use this mode when starting
running. This prevents the vehicle
into “P” position under any circum- from creeping. your vehicle in sand, mud, ice or snow.
stances. Serious mechanical damage To set the “2nd STRT” mode, push the
and loss of vehicle control may re- “2nd” button. In the “2nd STRT” mode, the
sult. NOTICE “2nd STRT” indicator light comes on.

Always use the brake pedal or the The “PWR” mode is automatically can-
parking brake to hold the vehicle on celled when you push the “2nd” button.
an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold
the vehicle using the accelerator ped-
al, as this can cause the transmission
to overheat.

140
 Four–wheel drive system—
(a) Four–wheel drive contro l
(i) If you cannot shift the selector le- Use the center differential lock system if
ver out of “P” position your wheels get stuck in a ditch, or when
If you cannot shift the selector lever from you are driving on a slippery or bumpy
the “P” position even though the brake surface. When the center differential is
pedal is depressed, use the shift lock locked, the vehicle stability control system
override button. For instructions, see “If is automatically turned off and the center
you cannot shift automatic transmission differential lock and “VSC OFF” indicator
selector lever” on page 290. lights come on because the function that
controls engine performance interferes
with the process of freeing your wheels.

NOTICE
As soon as the center differential lock
switch is turned on, the “VSC OFF”
Use the four- wheel drive control lever
indicator light comes on. After the
and center differential lock button to
wheels are out of the ditch or off the
select the transfer and center differen-
slippery or bumpy surface, turn the
tial modes.
center differential lock switch off.
The “H” and “L” position of the four- wheel Make sure the center differential lock
drive control lever provides either lock or indicator light and vehicle stability
unlock mode of the center differential de- control system off indicator light turn
pending on the center differential lock but- off.
ton position.

141
“H” (high speed position, center differ- In this mode, the braking feeling that oc- The center differential lock system opera-
ential unlocked): Lever at “H”, center dif- curs when the wheels are negotiating a tion is not completed within 5 seconds
ferential lock button left out sharp corner is further reduced than in the while the cruise control system is set,
Use this for normal driving on all types of “L” (low position, center differential locked) cancel the cruise control system. To can-
roads, from dry hard- surfaced roads to mode. cel the cruise control system, see “Cruise
wet, icy or snow- covered roads. This “L” (low speed position, center differen- control” on page 155.
position gives greater economy, quietest tial locked): Lever at “L”, center differen- If the indicator light does not go off when
ride, least wear and better vehicle control. tial lock button pushed in. you push out the center differential lock
“H” (high speed position, center differ- Use this for maximum power and traction. button, drive straight ahead while acceler-
ential locked): Lever at “H”, center differ- Use this for hard pulling in situations the ating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.
ential lock button pushed in vehicle cannot negotiate even in the “L” See “(b) Shifting procedure” for further in-
Use this for greater traction when you (low speed position, center differential un- structions.
experience a loss of power, such as locked) mode. Also, using this mode when Advice for driving on slippery roads in
wheel slipping, in the center differential driving down steep off- road inclines will “L” (low speed position) mode
unlock mode. help contribute to increased vehicle stabil-
ity. If you shift the four- wheel drive control
“N” (neutral position): Lever at “N” lever to “L” and the automatic transmis-
The indicator light tells when the differen- sion lever to “2” when you drive in steep
No power is delivered to the wheels. The tial lock is engaged. Note that the differ-
vehicle must be stopped. off- road areas, the output of the brake
ential is not still locked as long as the can be controlled effectively by the active
“L” (low speed position, center differen- indicator light remains off. traction control system, which assists the
tial unlocked): Lever at “L”, center differ- When the operation is not completed, the driver to control the driving power of 4
ential lock button left out indicator blinks. If the indicator light does wheels.
Use this for maximum power and traction. not go off when you push out the center
Use this for climbing or descending steep differential lock switch, drive straight
hills, off- road driving, and hard pulling in ahead while accelerating or decelerating,
sand or mud. or drive in reverse.

142
 (b) Shifting procedure
Use the “L” position of the automatic SHIFTING BETWEEN “H” (UNLOCKED)
transmission lever for maximum power AND “H” (LOCKED)
NOTICE
and traction when your wheels get stuck To shift between unlock and lock For normal driving on dry and hard
or when you drive down a steep incline. modes in “H”, push the center differential surface roads, unlock the center dif-
In the following cases, the output of the lock button. ferential. To prevent damage to the
brake can be controlled by the active trac- center differential lock system, do not
tion control system if the engine speed is SHIFTING BETWEEN “L” (UNLOCKED)
AND “L” (LOCKED)
push the center differential lock but-
under 3,000 rpm (normally engine speed ton when the vehicle is cornering or
is under 3,000 rpm when the wheels get To shift between unlock and lock when its wheels are spinning freely
unstuck). modes in “L”, push the center differential off the ground. If the indicator light
 The four- wheel drive control lever in lock button. does not go off when unlocking the
the “L” position and the automatic SHIFTING BETWEEN “H” AND “L” center differential, drive straight
transmission lever in the “L” position or Stop the vehicle, put the transmission into
ahead while accelerating or decelerat-
the automatic transmission lever in the “N” and move the four- wheel drive control
ing, or drive in reverse.
“D”, “4”, “3” or “2” with the transmis- lever.
sion downshifting to the first gear
 The four- wheel drive control lever in CAUTION
the “L” position and the automatic
transmission lever in the “R” position Never move the four –wheel drive con-
(As for the automatic transmission lever trol lever if wheels are slipping. Wait
positions, see “Automatic transmission” on until the wheels have stopped slip-
page 137.) ping or spinning before shifting.

143
Active traction control system
When active traction control is applied,
the active traction control system indi-
cator light blinks.
You may hear a sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the ac-
tive traction control system is in the self-
check mode, and does not indicate mal-
function. When the active traction control
system is operating, you may feel vibra-
tion or hear noise of your vehicle, caused
by operation of the brakes. This indicates
the system is functioning properly.
Active traction control system indicator Active traction control system failure
light When getting the vehicle out of mud or warning
newly fallen snow, etc., the active traction
The active traction control system auto- control system will help operate to prevent This light warns when there is a problem
matically helps control the spinning of the wheels from spinning. somewhere in the active traction control
4 wheels which may occur when accel- system.
erating on slippery road surfaces, by If the “VSC/TRAC” warning light comes
controlling the output of the brake and on, have your vehicle checked by your
engine. Thus, the system assists driver Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
to control the driving power of 4
wheels. When you turn the ignition
switch on, the active traction control
system always turns on automatically,
and the active traction control indicator
light will come on. The indicator light
will go off after a few seconds.

144
The brake actuator temperature increases The “VSC/TRAC” warning light may stay
during the active traction control system on for 60 seconds after the ignition key CAUTION
or vehicle stability control system operat- is turned to “ON” position. It is normal if
ing. If the brake actuator temperature be- it goes off after a few seconds. Under certain slippery road condi-
comes too high while the active traction tions, full traction of the vehicles and
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
control system or vehicle stability control power to 4 wheels may not be main-
may turn on the “VSC/TRAC” warning
system is operating, a buzzer will start to tained, even though the active trac-
light. It is normal if it goes off after a few
sound intermittently to indicate that the tion control system is in operation.
seconds.
active traction control system can no lon- Do not drive the vehicle under any
ger operate. In this case, immediately stop When the “VSC/TRAC” warning light speed or maneuvering conditions
your vehicle at a safe place. If the system comes on the active traction control sys- which will cause the vehicle to lose
continues to operate, the buzzer sound tem is not operating, but there is no prob- traction. In situations where the road
changes from intermittent to continuous. lem if you continue to drive. surface is covered with ice or snow,
(The continuous buzzer sounds for about In the following cases, contact your Toyota your vehicle should be fitted with
3 seconds.) At the time, the “VSC/TRAC” dealer: snow tires or tire chains. Always
warning light will come on and the active drive at an appropriate and cautious
 The “VSC/TRAC” warning light does not speed for the road conditions pres-
traction control system temporarily stops come on after the ignition key is turned
operating in order to protect the brake ent.
“ON”.
actuator. (Although the active traction con-
trol system does not operate, there is no  The “VSC/TRAC” remains on after the
problem to continue your driving.) The ignition key is turned “ON”.
system will be automatically restored after
a short time and “VSC/TRAC” warning
light goes off if the accelerator pedal is
released.
When the “ABS” warning light come on,
the active traction control system is not
operating.
The “VSC/TRAC” warning light will come
on when the ignition key is turned “ON”,
and will go off after a few seconds.
145
Vehicle stability control
system
The vehicle stability control system
helps provide integrated control of the CAUTION  Only use tires of specified size. The
systems such as anti- lock brake, trac- size, manufacturer, brand and tread
tion control, engine control, etc. This  Active traction control system, ve- pattern for all 4 tires should be the
system automatically controls the out- hicle stability control system and same. If you use the tires other
put of the brakes or engine to help anti- lock brake system are electron- than specified, or different type or
prevent the vehicle from skidding under ic systems designed to help the size, the vehicle stability control
adverse conditions. driver maintain control under ad- system may not function correctly.
verse conditions. They are not a When replacing the tires or wheels,
The system activates when the vehicle
substitute for safe driving practices. contact your Toyota dealer. (See
speed is about more than 15 km/h (9 “Checking and replacing tires” on
Factors including speed, road con-
mph).
ditions and driver steering input page 323.)
You may hear a sound in the engine can all affect whether active trac-
compartment for a few seconds when the tion control system, vehicle stability
engine is started or just after the vehicle control system and anti- lock brake
begins to move. This means that the ve- system will be effective in prevent-
hicle stability control system is in the ing a loss of control. Always keep
self- check mode and does not indicate a safety driving in mind. If the slip
malfunction. indicator light flashes, sounding an
alarm, special care should be taken
while driving.

146
If the vehicle is going to skid during driv- Pushing the center differential lock button Vehicle stability control system failure
ing, the slip indicator light flashes and an automatically turns the vehicle stability warning
alarm sounds intermittently. control system off. At this time, the “VSC These lights warn when there is a prob-
When you turn the ignition switch on, the OFF” indicator comes on with the center lem somewhere in the vehicle stability
slip indicator light will come on. The slip differential lock indicator light. (For details, control system or active traction control
indicator light will go off after a few sec- see “Four- wheel drive system—(a)Four- system.
onds. wheel drive control” on page 141.)
If the “VSC/TRAC” warning light and “VSC
OFF” indicator light come on, have your
vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible. However, there is no
problem if the “VSC/TRAC” warning light
comes on when the brake actuator tem-
perature becomes high. (For details, see
“Active traction control system” on page
144.)

147
 Tire pressure warning system—
When the “ABS” warning light comes on, If the low tire pressure warning light does
the vehicle stability control system is not not go off or comes on during driving, it
operating. indicates that tire inflation pressure is low.
The “VSC/TRAC” warning light and “VSC Make sure there is no flat tire. If the
OFF” indicator light will come on when the light comes on again even after tire infla-
ignition key is turned “ON”, and will go off tion pressure adjustment, you may have a
after a few seconds.
The “VSC/TRAC” warning light and “VSC 16C521a flat tire. If there is not adequate air
pressure in the tires, the light will not go
OFF” indicator light may stay on for 60 off.
seconds after the ignition key is turned to The light may turn on due to natural
“ON” position. It is normal if they go off causes such as natural air leaks or tire
after a few seconds. inflation pressure changes caused by tem-
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly perature. In this case, adjusting the tire
may turn on the lights. It is normal if they inflation pressure will turn off the light.
Low tire pressure warning light
go off after a few seconds.
The tire pressure warning system is not
When the “VSC/TRAC” warning light and
The light warns you that the tire infla- a substitute for checking tire inflation
“VSC OFF” indicator light come on, the
tion pressure is low. pressure.
vehicle stability control system is not op-
erating, but there is no problem if you The low tire pressure warning light comes For details about adjusting the tire
continue to drive. on when the ignition key is turned to the inflation pressure, see “Checking tire
In the following cases, contact your Toyota “ON” position and goes off after a few inflation pressure” on page 320.
dealer: seconds. This means the low tire pres- If the low tire pressure warning light
 The “VSC/TRAC” warning light, “VSC sure warning light is operating properly. comes on, the action you must take is
OFF” indicator light and slip indicator If the tire inflation pressure becomes low, different depending on the type of tires
light do not come on after the ignition the light comes on again. used.
key is turned “ON”.
 The “VSC/TRAC” warning light and
“VSC OFF” indicator light remain on af-
ter the ignition key is turned “ON”.
 The “VSC OFF” indicator light comes
on while driving without pushing the
center differential lock switch.
148
Stop your vehicle at a safe place as soon
as possible and check that the tire infla- CAUTION Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
tion pressure is as specified on the tire vided), should be checked monthly
and loading information label. If the low If the low tire pressure warning light when cold and inflated to the inflation
tire pressure warning light comes on even comes on, observe the following in- pressure recommended by the vehicle
after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it structions: manufacture on the vehicle placard or
is probable that you have a flat tire. If  Decelerate as soon as possible to tire inflation pressure label. (If your
the tire goes flat, change to the spare the most appropriate speed that vehicle has tires of a different size
tire. (See page 275.) conditions permit. than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure la-
The spare tire is not equipped with the  Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneu- bel, you should consult the appropri-
tire pressure sensor. So, the low tire vering and braking. If the vehicle ate section of the owner’s manual to
pressure warning light remains on even if tires deteriorate, you could lose determine the proper tire inflation
the spare tire is mounted. control of the steering wheel or the pressure.) When the low tire pressure
The light goes off a few minutes after air brakes, causing death or serious in- telltale is illuminated, one or more of
is put into the deflated tire. jury. your tires is significantly under- in-
 The warning system may not acti- flated. You should stop and check
vate immediately if bursts or sud- your tires as soon as possible, and
den air leakage should occur. inflate them to the proper pressure as
indicated on the vehicle’s tire infor-
mation placard. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under- inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under- inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.

149
Your vehicle has also been equipped NOTICE z Warning tends to turn on when
with a TPMS malfunction telltale to driving at lower outside tempera-
indicate when the system is not oper- z Do not use liquid sealants for a flat ture, such as in winter, because tire
ating properly. When the malfunction tire as tire pressure sensors will be inflation pressure will be decreased
telltale is illuminated, the system may damaged. due to the low temperature. In this
not be able to detect or signal low z When the tires must be repaired or case, after adjustment and initializa-
tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal- replaced, have them repaired or re- tion, leave the ignition on for about
function may occur for a variety of placed by the nearest Toyota dealer 20 minutes and increase the tire
reasons, including the installation of or authorized tire dealer. The tire inflation pressure by 20 to 30 kPa.
incompatible replacement tires on the pressure sensors will be affected
vehicle. Always check the TPMS mal- by the installation or removal of
function telltale after replacing one or tires.
more tires on your vehicle to ensure
z The tire pressure warning system is
that the replacement tires are compat- not to be used as a substitute for
ible with the TPMS.
regular inspections. Be sure to
check the air pressure in the tires
on a regular basis.
z When the tires must be replaced,
replace the grommets for tire pres-
sure sensors as well.
z Tire inflation pressure should be
adjusted for all 5 tires (including a
spare tire).

150
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
NOTICE This device complies with Part 15 of the
If the low tire pressure warning light
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
blinks, it indicates a system malfunc- z The use of non- genuine wheels will following two conditions: (1) This device
tion. Contact your Toyota dealer. cause the tire pressure sensors to may not cause harmful interference, and
The system will be disabled in the condi- transmit the electronic code in dif- (2) this device must accept any interfer-
tions below: ferent manner, resulting in the fail- ence received, including interference
 Electric devices or facilities using simi- ure of the system. that may cause undesired operation.
lar radio wave frequencies are nearby. z The use of tires other than origi- NOTICE:
 If a radio set at similar frequencies is nally installed with genuine wheels This equipment has been tested and
in use. may also cause the malfunction of found to comply with the limits for a
the system. Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
 Much snowflakes or ice gets on the
vehicle, in particular, around the wheels 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
or wheel housings. designed to provide reasonable protec-
tion against harmful interference in a
 Non- genuine Toyota wheels are used. residential installation. This equipment
 Snow tires or tire chains are used. generates, uses and can radiate radio
 The sensor battery is expired. frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruc-
 The tires not equipped with tire pres- tions, may cause harmful interference to
sure sensor are used. radio communications. However, there is
 Radio waves from the air pressure sen- no guarantee that interference will not
sor installed on the spare tire cannot occur in a particular installation. If this
be received. equipment does cause harmful interfer-
 Although the tires are equipped with ence to radio or television reception,
tire pressure sensors, the selector which can be determined by turning the
switch (see page 154) is set to other equipment off and on, the user is en-
tire setting. couraged to try to correct the interfer-
ence by one or more of the following
measures:

151
 —Replacing tires and wheels
As you might have difficulty in locating
 Reorient or relocate the receiving an- a flat or deflated tire, a tire pressure
NOTICE
tenna. warning system should be installed on z Have the tires, wheels or sensors
 Increase the separation between the the tires of this vehicle. replaced and ID codes registered by
equipment and receiver. When replacing the wheels, be sure to Toyota dealer. If you need sensors,
 Connect the equipment into an outlet install tire pressure sensors on the purchase from Toyota dealer.
on a circuit different from that to wheels. z The sensor nuts should always be
which the receiver is connected. There are 3 ways to set up the tire pres- tightened to a torque of 4 N·m (0.4
 Consult the dealer or an experienced sure sensors: kgf·m, 2.9 ft·lbf).
radio / TV technician for help. a. Remove the sensor from the old wheel z The use of non- genuine wheels will
FCC WARNING: and install it to the new wheel. cause the tire pressure sensors to
Changes or modifications not ex- b. Keep the same wheel with tire pres- transmit the electronic code in dif-
pressly approved by the party respon- sure sensor and replace the tire alone. ferent manner, resulting in the fail-
sible for compliance could void the ure of the system.
c. Use a new wheel and sensor.
user’s authority to operate the equip- z Initialization should be performed
ment. You have to register an ID code for a with the tires adjusted with the
new sensor. Up to 2 sets of codes tires adjusted at the specified set
can be registered. As one ID for the tire inflation pressure. If they are
originally installed sensor is registered not adjusted properly, tire inflation
at “MAIN” of the selector switch, use pressure to be warned will not be
the “2nd” position to register an ID for appropriate. It takes about 20 min-
the new sensor. utes for initialization. Leave the
You do not need to re- register the ID ignition on for about 20 minutes
code for any other replacements. For after initialization.
the use of the originally installed tires,
put the selector switch at “MAIN” and
for the use of tires set purchased later,
put the switch at “2nd”. For the sen-
sor selector switch, see page 154.

152
 To initialize the system, perform the fol-
lowing:
1. Park the vehicle at a safe place and
apply the parking brake. Stop the en-
gine.
2. Adjust the pressure of all the installed
16C523 tires to the specified level. (See 16C522a
“Tires” on page 344.)
3. Start the engine.
4. Push and hold the reset switch until
the low tire pressure warning light
blinks three times.
Do not turn the engine off for about 20
TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM RE- When initializing the system, make sure
minutes until initialization is complete.
SET SWITCH the low tire pressure warning light blinks
The tire pressure warning system needs three times. If the warning light does not
to be initialized in the following condi- blink three times, initialization failed and
tions: the tire pressure warning system will not
function properly. In this case, initialize
 After changing the set pressure the system again.
along with the change of the loading
condition or vehicle speed condition Do not push the reset switch without ad-
justing the tire inflation pressure to the
 After replacing the ECU specified level. Otherwise, the low tire
 After replacing or tires or wheels pressure warning light may not come on
 After replacing the tire pressure sen- even if the tire inflation pressure is low,
sor or it may come on when the tire inflation
pressure is actually normal.
When initializing the system, the pres-
ent tire condition is stored as a stan- If you push the reset switch while the
dard. vehicle is moving, initialization is not per-
formed.
153
 —Selector switch
If the low tire pressure warning light does ID codes should be registered by Toyota
not blink when you push and hold the dealer. Once registered, change the set-
reset switch, have the tire pressure warn- ting position each time you purchase tires
ing system checked at your Toyota dealer. and wheels. Re- registration is not re-
quired.
NOTICE
z Do not turn the engine switch off
16C524a When purchasing new tires, consult your
Toyota dealer.
during initialization, or the system
may not function properly due to CAUTION
incomplete initialization.
When the tires whose ID code is
z Check which tires are being used
registered at “MAIN” are used, the
before initialization of the system,
system does not work properly with
and also check the selector switch
the selector switch set at “2nd”. If
position. (See the following “Selec- 1. Main position the tires whose ID code is registered
tor switch”.)
2. 2nd position at “2nd” are stored nearby, the sys-
The selector switch is located in the
tem will detect their tire inflation
glove box. pressure (and vice versa).
The ID code is given in the tire pres-
sure sensor. To activate the tire pres-
sure warning system, it is necessary to
register the ID code of the sensor on
the selector switch in the vehicle.
2 sets of ID codes can be registered.
The code of the tires originally installed
on the vehicle is registered on the switch
at “MAIN”. Have a new tires set with
new tire pressure sensors registered at
“2nd” by Toyota dealer.

154
Parking brake Cruise control
The cruise control allows you to cruise
CAUTION the vehicle at a desired speed over
about 40 km/h (25 mph) even with your
Before driving, be sure the parking foot off the accelerator pedal.
brake is fully released and the park-
Your cruising speed can be maintained
ing brake reminder light is off.
within the limits of engine performance,
although a slight speed change may occur
when driving up or down the grades. On
steeper hills, a greater speed change will
occur so it is better to drive without the
cruise control.
When the cruise control is on, the driving
pattern of the automatic transmission is
fixed in the normal position, regardless of
When parking, firmly apply the parking
brake to avoid inadvertent creeping. the position of the driving pattern selector
switch.
To set: Pull up the lever. For better hold-
ing power, first depress the brake pedal
and hold it while setting the parking
brake.
To release: Pull up the lever slightly (1),
press the lock release button (2), and low-
er (3).
To remind you that the parking brake is
set, the parking brake reminder light in
the instrument panel remains on until you
release the parking brake.

155
 CAUTION

 To help maintain maximum control

of your vehicle, do not use the
cruise control when driving in
heavy or varying traffic, or on slip-
pery (rainy, icy or snow –covered) or
winding roads.
 Avoid vehicle speed increases when
driving downhill. If the vehicle
speed is too fast in relation to the
cruise control set speed, cancel the
cruise control then downshift the
transmission to use engine braking TURNING THE SYSTEM ON SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED
to slow down. To operate the cruise control, push the The transmission must be in “D” or “4”
“ON- OFF” switch. This turns the system before you set the cruise control speed.
on. The indicator light in the instrument Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,
panel shows that you can now set the push the lever down in the “– SET” direc-
vehicle at a desired cruising speed. Anoth- tion and release it. This sets the vehicle
er push on the switch will turn the system at that speed.
completely off.
If the speed is not satisfactory, tap the
lever up for a faster speed, or tap it down
CAUTION
for a slower speed. Each tap changes the
To avoid accidental cruise control en- set speed by 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph). You can
now take your foot off the accelerator
gagement, keep the “ON- OFF” switch
off when not using the cruise control. pedal.

156
If you need acceleration—for example, RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED
when passing—depress the accelerator Push the lever up in the “+ RES” direction If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling
pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed and hold it. Release the lever when the the control lever or by depressing the
the set speed. When you release it, the desired speed is attained. While the lever brake pedal, pushing the lever up in the
vehicle will return to the speed set prior is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain “+ RES” direction will restore the speed
to the acceleration. speed. set prior to cancellation.
CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED However, a faster way to reset is to ac- If the preset speed is cancelled when ve-
You can cancel the preset speed by: celerate the vehicle and then push the hicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25
a. Pulling the control lever in the control lever down in the “– SET” direc- mph), the preset speed will be resumed
“CANCEL” direction and releasing it. tion. when vehicle speed exceeds about 40
RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED km/h (25 mph) again.
b. Depressing the brake pedal.
Push the lever down in the “– SET” direc- CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING
c. Pushing the “ON- OFF” switch.
tion and hold it. Release the lever when If the “CRUISE” indicator light in the
If the vehicle speed falls below about 40 the desired speed is attained. While the instrument cluster flashes when using the
km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will auto- lever is held down, the vehicle speed will cruise control, press the “ON- OFF” switch
matically cancel out. gradually decrease. to turn the system off and then press it
If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10 However, a faster way to reset is to de- again to turn it on.
mph) below the preset speed, the preset press the brake pedal and then push the If any of the following conditions then oc-
speed will also automatically cancel out. control lever down in the “– SET” direc- curs, there is some trouble in the cruise
If the preset speed automatically cancels tion. control system.
out for other than the above cases, have Even if you downshift the transmission  The indicator light does not come on.
your vehicle checked by your Toyota deal- from the “D” position to “4” with the cruise
er at the earliest opportunity.  The indicator light flashes again.
control on, engine braking will not be ap-
plied because the cruise control is not  The indicator light goes out after it
cancelled. To decrease the vehicle speed, comes on.
reset to a slower speed with the cruise If this is the case, contact your Toyota
control lever or depress the brake pedal. dealer and have your vehicle inspected.
If you use the brake pedal, cruise control
is cancelled.

157
Active height control
suspension (AHC)
(a) Vehicle height modes When the vehicle exceeds the specified
“HI” (high) mode— vehicle speed, the vehicle height
changes to the following:
The vehicle height is about 40 mm (1.6
in.) higher at front and about 50 mm With the four- wheel drive control lever
(2.0 in.) higher at rear than the normal at “H” and at the vehicle speed of 30
mode height. km/h (19 mph) or over, the normal mode
is automatically selected.
This mode is suitable when driving on the
bumpy roads and through water. With the four- wheel drive control lever
at “L” and at the vehicle speed of 50
This mode is available when the vehicle km/h (30 mph) or over, the vehicle height
speed is under about 30 km/h (19 mph). becomes automatically about 25 mm (1.0
in.) higher than the normal mode height.
CAUTION If the vehicle speed is lowered about 20
km/h (12 mph) or less after that, the high
This active height control suspension The “HI” (high) or “Extra high” mode mode automatically resumes.
controls the vehicle height depending should be used for severe off- road
on the vehicle driving condition. Select driving condition only. Because the
your desired height among the “HI” vehicle’s center of gravity is higher in
(high), “N” (normal) and “LO” (low) this setting, the vehicle may become
modes with the height select switch. unstable when turning abruptly, re-
sulting in an accident.

When the four- wheel drive control lever is

put at “L”, this mode may change to the
extra high mode automatically in accor-
dance with the driving condition.

158
Extra high mode— “N” (normal) mode— (b) Automatic leveling function
This mode is automatically selected The vehicle height in this mode is stan- Regardless of the number of occupants
from the high mode with the four- wheel dard. or the luggage loading condition, the
drive control lever placed in “L” posi- This mode is suitable for ordinary driving. vehicle height is always automatically
tion depending on the vehicle driving adjusted to a fixed height in any mode.
condition. “LO” (low) mode—
However, the vehicle height cannot be
If the vehicle becomes stuck, the vehicle The vehicle height is about 50 mm (2.0 raised if the vehicle load exceeds the lim-
height rises automatically to the extra high in.) lower at front and about 40 mm its. (See “(d) Vehicle height adjustment”
mode (slightly higher or at about 70 mm (1.6 in.) lower at rear than the normal described below.)
(2.8 in.) higher than normal mode height). mode height.
In the following cases, the extra high This mode allows you easy access to the
mode changes to the high mode automati- vehicle (getting in and out) and easy load-
cally: ing and unloading operation.
 When your vehicle is no longer stuck. This mode is available when the vehicle
is stopped. When you start the vehicle,
 When the four- wheel drive control lever the normal mode is automatically selected.
is put in a position other than “L”.
When you push the height select switch NOTICE
on the “ ” side in the extra high
The normal mode is automatically se-
mode, the normal mode is selected. lected when the vehicle begins to
Since the extra high mode is automatically move in the low mode. So be careful
selected, you cannot select this mode on when you drive in any place where
purpose with the height select switch. the overhead height is limited.

159
(c) Vehicle height mode changing In the following cases the active height
condition control suspension does not operate
To change the vehicle height, it is nec- even if the above conditions are all
essary to meet the following 3 condi- met.
tions.  The brake pedal has been depressed
 The engine should be running. for longer than about 5 seconds with
the vehicle stopped.
 All the side doors and back door
should be closed.  The suspension fluid temperature is
lower than –30C (–22F). If the en-
 The height control “OFF” indicator gine is warmed up, the suspension
light should go off. fluid temperature will be raised as the
When selecting a mode with the four- inside of the engine compartment be-
wheel drive control lever at “H”, there is comes warmer. Then the active height
a vehicle speed limit. Refer to the follow- control system becomes operable.
ing table. (d) Vehicle height adjustment
 Driving on the bumpy roads, which
To change the mode, push the height
Yes = The mode can be selected. may cause the suspension to fully
select switch on either side of
No = The mode cannot be selected. elongate.
“ ”(higher) and “ ”(lower).
Low Normal High  The steering wheel is operated abruptly
mode mode mode more than 3/4 turns with center differ- The height control indicator light indicates
ential lock system activated. which mode is selected. (See “(f) Height
At vehicle control indicator lights” described below.)
Yes Yes Yes
stoppage
Under about 30
No Yes Yes
km/h (19 mph)
About 30 km/h
No Yes No
(19 mph) or over

160
 The vehicle height cannot be raised if Selecting the high mode—
NOTICE the vehicle load exceeds the following
Push the height select switch on the “ ”
z If you change the vehicle height fre- limits:
side when the vehicle speed is under
quently, the pump may overheat. To  Up to 4 occupants∗ plus about 280 kg about 30 km/h (19 mph).
prevent this, the active height con- (617 lb.) in the normal mode
trol suspension should be stopped To change the normal mode to high,
 Up to 4 occupants∗ plus about 150 kg push the switch once.
temporarily for a minute between (331 lb.) in the high mode
selections. Operate it again. ∗:
To change the low mode to high, push
About 75 kg (165 lb.) for a person the switch twice. It takes about 30 se-
z Before you lower the vehicle height
with the height select switch, check If the above load capacity is exceeded, conds until the low mode changes to the
under the vehicle to make sure the desired vehicle height may not be ob- high mode.
nothing to damage the vehicle or tained even if the height select switch is Selecting the normal mode—
no one to be injured is there and pushed. (If the vehicle height cannot be
raised in the normal mode and the height To change the high mode to normal,
that the underbody of the vehicle
control indicator indicates “LO”, this is be- push the height select switch on the “ ”
does not touch the ground.
cause the vehicle is loaded too heavily. side once.
z After unloading, the height of a ve- Under these conditions, drive your vehicle To change the low mode to normal,
hicle equipped with the active with due care.)
height control suspension becomes push the height select switch on the “ ”
slightly higher than the normal ve- If the vehicle height cannot be raised side once.
hicle height. Take sufficient care even after unloading, push the height se-
Selecting the low mode—
where the overhead height is re- lect switch on the “ ” side and then on
Push the height control switch on the
stricted. the “ ” side. If this does not work, turn
“ ” side while the vehicle is stopped.
off the ignition once and then turn on.
Operate the select switch again. To change the high mode to low, push
the switch twice.
If the vehicle height is adjusted on the
slope, or with the selector lever in a posi- To change the normal mode to low,
tion other than “P” or “N” while the vehicle push the switch once.
is stopped, you may hear a sound caused
by the expansion and contraction of the
propeller shaft.

161
 NOTICE CAUTION
Do not select the low mode in the
If you drive through deep water over
bumpy roads. If the underbody of the
about 500 mm (20 in.) in depth, put
vehicle touches the rugged road sur-
the vehicle height in the HI (High)
face, the vehicle may be damaged.
mode with the active height select
switch and then turn off the active
Even if the engine is stopped while the height control suspension by pushing
vehicle height is being lowered, the op- the height control switch. Drive your
eration continues for up to 12 seconds. vehicle at 30 km/h (19 mph) or lower
speed.

NOTICE
(e) Turning off the active height control
suspension z When jacking up or installing tire
To turn off the active height control chains, be sure to turn off the ac-
suspension with the vehicle stopped, tive height control suspension and
push the height control switch. The stop the engine. Otherwise, the ve-
height control “OFF” indicator light hicle height may change because of
comes on and the vehicle height is the automatic leveling function, re-
fixed in the same mode as the height sulting in an accident.
control switch is pushed. z If your vehicle must be towed, put
This status is memorized in the system the vehicle height in the normal
even after the engine is stopped. mode and turn off the active height
If you push the switch again, the height control suspension. Otherwise, the
control “OFF” indicator light goes out and vehicle height may change because
the active height control suspension is of the automatic leveling function,
turned on. resulting in an accident.

162
z If your vehicle gets ditched, turn off
the active height control suspension
with the height control switch.
Otherwise, the vehicle height may
change because of the automatic
leveling function, resulting in an ac-
cident.

Even after the active height control

suspension is turned off with the height
control switch, if the vehicle speed ex-
ceeds 30 km (19 mph), the active height
control automatically selects the normal
mode. (f) Height control indicator lights If you change the vehicle height mode,
1. Height control indicator lights the indicator lights change as follows:
2. Height control “OFF” indicator light When changing the vehicle height from
the normal mode to high:
When the ignition switch is turned on,
all the indicator lights come on. The 1. The “N” (normal) mode indicator light
indicator light showing the present goes off and the “HI” (high) mode indi-
mode only remains on and all other cator light blinks.
lights go off after a few seconds. This 2. After the vehicle height control reaches
means the system operates correctly. the high mode, the high mode indicator
light remains on.

163
With the active height control suspen- If the vehicle is loaded heavily, the ve- Height control “OFF” indicator light:
sion turned off, if you operate the hicle height cannot be raised even if When the ignition switch is turned on, this
height select switch or the vehicle the height select switch is operated. If light comes on. If it goes out after a few
height is changing depending on the the underbody of the vehicle has seconds, the active height control suspen-
vehicle speed, the vehicle height con- touched the surface on bumpy roads, sion operates correctly. If you push the
trol enters the ready mode. In this the vehicle height cannot be lowered height control switch, the active height
case, the height control indicator lights with the height select switch. The control is turned off. The height control
change as follows: height control indicator lights change “OFF” indicator light comes on.
1. The present mode indicator light comes as follows: In the following cases, there is a problem
on and at the same time the ready 1. The present mode indicator light goes somewhere in your active height control
mode indicator light blinks. off and the selected mode indicator suspension. Although there is no problem
2. When the active height control suspen- light blinks. to continue normal driving, have the active
sion is turned on, the present mode 2. The selected mode indicator light goes height control suspension checked by your
indicator light goes off and the ready off. (The vehicle height does not Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
mode indicator light blinks. (The vehicle change.) The present mode indicator  The height control “OFF” indicator light
height changes.) light comes on again. does not come on when the ignition
3. After the vehicle height has changed switch is turned on.
completely, the changed mode indicator  The height control “OFF” indicator light
light stays on. blinks.

164
(g) Operation in cold weather (h) Parking and stopping tips (i) Installing or removing heavy equip-
The active height control suspension If you immediately stop the engine to park ment
does not operate in cold weather when the vehicle after off- road driving, the ve- If you install or remove heavy equipment
the suspension fluid temperature drops hicle height is lowered slightly as the ve- exceeding 15 kg (33 lb.), the front torsion
below –30C (–22F). hicle becomes cool. When parking, make bar should be adjusted. Consult your To-
In this case, operating the height control sure there is nothing that will be in con- yota dealer.
switch does not change the vehicle height. tact with the underbody of the vehicle. (j) Active height control failure warning
The vehicle height control enters the When you start the engine, the vehicle
returns to the previous height. If there is a problem somewhere in the
ready mode and the selected height con- active height control suspension, the nor-
trol indicator light blinks. The active height If you park the vehicle for a long time, mal mode is automatically selected. If this
control becomes operable if the engine is the vehicle height may be gradually low- occurs, the height control “OFF” indicator
warmed up with the suspension fluid tem- ered. When parking for a long time, make light blinks and the vehicle height control
perature being raised within normal operat- sure there is nothing that will be in con- cannot be activated until the malfunction
ing limits. The vehicle changes to the se- tact with the underbody of the vehicle. is corrected.
lected height when the vehicle height When you start the engine, the vehicle
control is in the ready mode. returns to the previous height. Stop the engine and start it again. If the
height control “OFF” indicator light goes
When the suspension fluid temperature is If you stop the engine, the vehicle height out, the active height control suspension
around –30C (–22F), the vehicle height may change in accordance with the returns to normal. If the height control
cannot be raised even within the available change in the temperature. When you “OFF” indicator blinks again, bring your
load capacity. After warming up the en- start the engine, the vehicle returns to the vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as
gine, push the control switch on the “ ” previous height. possible and have it checked.
side once and then on the “ ” side to
select the desired vehicle height.
It takes longer to change the vehicle
height when the suspension fluid tem-
perature drops below –15C (5F).

165
Skyhook TEMS
(Skyhook Toyota electronic
modulated suspension)
We recommend you to select the mode 2
for ordinary driving. The damping effect
will be changed automatically to provide
good riding comfort.
When your vehicle is loaded heavily or
you are driving in an unpaved road, the
mode 3 or 4 will be recommended. To
provide good vehicle stability, the damping
effect will be harder than for ordinary driv-
ing mode.
With the four- wheel drive control lever at
“L”, the damping effect suitable for off-
road driving will be harder in any mode.
This skyhook TEMS adjusts the damp-
ing effect on the shock absorbers with
the damping mode select switch. Select
one of the 4 modes which is suited to
the driving conditions with the damping
mode select switch to provide good rid-
ing comfort and stability.
1. For driving on a bumpy road
2. For ordinary driving such as in the city
traffic
3. For moderate high speed driving
4. For sporty type driving such as on
winding mountain roads and high speed
driving

166
 SECTION 1- 8
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Audio system
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Using your audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Audio system operating hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Rear seat audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Audio remote controls (steering switches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to the

separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

167
 Using your audio system—
Reference —some basics
This section describes some of the basic SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS
features on Toyota audio systems. Some Push “AM·SAT”, “FM”, “TAPE” or “DISC”
information may not pertain to your sys- if the system is already on but you want
tem. to switch from one function to another.
Your audio system works when the ignition *: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner
key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
17c509c TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF
and service. Contact your Toyota dealer
for details.
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system LISTENING TO THE XM SATELLITE RA-
on and off. DIO BROADCAST*
Push “AM·SAT”, “FM”, “TAPE” or “DISC” To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in
to turn on that function without pushing your vehicle, an additional genuine Toyota
“PWR·VOL”. satellite receiver and antenna (or equiva-
You can turn on each player by inserting lents) must be purchased and installed. A
AM·FM radio/cassette player/compact subscription to the XM satellite radio ser-
a cassette tape or compact disc.
disc changer controller/compact disc vice is also necessary.
player with changer (with XM satellite You can turn off each player by ejecting
the cassette tape or compact disc. If the How to subscribe to an XM satellite
radio* controller)
audio system was previously off, then the radio
*: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner
entire audio system will be turned off An XM satellite radio is a tuner designed
and service. Contact your Toyota dealer
when you eject the cassette tape or com- exclusively to receive broadcasts provided
for details.
pact disc. If the another function was pre- under a separate subscription. Availability
viously playing, it will come on again. is limited to the 48 contiguous states.
*: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner
and service. Contact your Toyota dealer
for details.

168
How to subscribe: Satellite tuner technology notice: TONE AND BALANCE
You must enter into a separate service Toyota’s satellite radio tuners are awarded For details about your system’s tone and
agreement with the XM radio in order to Type Approval Certificates from XM Satel- balance controls, see the description of
receive satellite broadcast programming in lite Radio Inc. on “March 10, 2003” and your own system.
the vehicle. Additional activation and ser- “April 15, 2003” as proof of compatibility
vice subscription fees apply that are not with the services offered by the XM satel- Tone
included in the purchase price of the ve- lite radio. How good an audio program sounds to
hicle and optional digital satellite tuner. Displaying the radio ID you is largely determined by the mix of
For complete information on subscription the treble, midrange, and bass levels. In
rates and terms, or to subscribe to the Each XM tuner is identified with a unique
fact, different kinds of music and vocal
XM radio, visit XM on the web at radio ID. You will need the radio ID when
programs usually sound better with differ-
www.xmradio.com or call an XM’s Listener activating XM service or when reporting a
ent mixes of treble, midrange, and bass.
Care at (800) 852- 9696. The XM radio is problem.
Balance
solely responsible for the quality, availabil- If you select the “CH 000” using the
ity and content of the satellite radio ser- “AUDIO- TUNE” knob, the ID code of 8 A good balance of the left and right stereo
vices provided, which are subject to the alphanumeric characters appears. If you channels and of the front and rear sound
terms and conditions of the XM radio cus- select another channel, display of the ID levels is also important.
tomer service agreement. code is canceled. The channel (000) alter- Keep in mind that if you are listening to
Customers should have their radio ID nates the display between the radio ID a stereo recording or broadcast, changing
ready; the radio ID can be found by tun- and the specific radio ID code. the right/left balance will increase the vol-
ing to “channel 000” on the radio. For *: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner ume of one group of sounds while de-
details, see “Displaying the radio ID” be- and service. Contact your Toyota dealer creasing the volume of another.
low. for details.
All fees and programming are the respon-
sibility of the XM satellite radio and are
subject to change.

169
YOUR RADIO ANTENNA
NOTICE
Lowering the antenna
z Retract the antenna when entering
The antenna automatically extends when
or passing through low structures,
the radio is on, and retracts when the
such as a garage or an automatic
radio mode is off. However, even if you
car wash. Failure to do so may
turn off the radio when the radio on the
damage the antenna.
rear seat audio system is on, the antenna
does not retract. To lower a power anten- z The antenna mast has to be ex-
na, push the “Ɲ” (down) switch. Also, the tended higher than 100 mm (3.94
antenna automatically goes down when the in.) length when the audio is on.
radio mode is switched off to turn on the Extend the antenna mast when the Down Up
cassette tape player or compact disc play- radio signal is weak.
er, turning off the audio system by push- z Putting a window tint (especially,
ing “PWR·VOL” or turning the ignition key conductive or metallic type) on the Adjusting the power antenna
to “LOCK” position. right- hand rear quarter window may
To adjust the antenna height, push the
affect the reception of radio or mo-
switch at either side, this may also be
bile telephone. For the installation
performed during antenna extension. The
of the window tint, consult with
maximum extension length is 850 mm
your Toyota dealer.
(33.5 in.).
Every time you turn the radio on, the
antenna will extend to its previous posi-
tion.
Clean the antenna mast periodically with
a clean dry cloth.

170
 YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER
CAUTION
When you insert a disc, gently push it in
with the label side up.
Before extending the antenna, confirm
that no one is close enough to get The discs set in the player are played
injured. continuously, starting with disc number 1.
The disc number of the disc currently be-
ing played, the track number and the time
YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER
from the beginning of the program appear
When you insert a cassette, the exposed on the display.
tape should be to the right.
When play of one disc ends, the first
NOTICE track of the following disc starts. When
play of the final disc ends, play of the
Do not oil any part of the player and first disc starts again.
do not insert anything other than cas- The player will skip any empty disc num-
sette tapes into the slot, or the tape NOTICE
ber.
player may be damaged. z Do not stack up two discs for in-
sertion, or it will cause damage the
compact disc player. Insert only one
compact disc into slot at a time.
z Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the compact disc player. Do
not insert anything other than com-
pact discs into the slot.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm

(4.7 in.) discs only.

171
—Controls and features
Details of specific buttons, controls, and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.

17c517d

172
1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons) To recall a preset channel: Push the but- 2. Push and release the compact disc
These buttons are used to preset and ton for the channel you want. The preset eject button.
tune in radio stations. button number and channel number will To eject all the discs loaded in the player:
appear on the display. Push and hold the compact disc eject but-
To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station (see “AUDIO- TUNE” This radio can store three XM channels ton (until you hear a beep when the audio
knob or “SEEK TRACK” button). Push and for each button. (The display will show system is on). The last compact disc
hold down the button until you hear a “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” when you push played before pushing the button will be
beep—this will set the station to the but- “AM·SAT” button ejected first. If a disc is left in the slot
ton. The button number will appear on the *: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner for a long time, the function to eject all
display. and service. Contact your Toyota dealer the discs will be automatically cancelled.
To tune in to a preset station: Push the for details. (Program)
button for the station you want. The but- (Eject button) Push “ ” to select the other side of a
ton number and station frequency will ap-
pear on the display. Cassette tape cassette tape. The display indicates which
Push the cassette tape eject button to side is currently selected (“ ” indicates
These systems can store one AM and two
FM stations for each button (The display eject a cassette. top side, “ ” indicates bottom side).
will show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you Compact disc Auto- reverse feature: After the cassette
push “AM·SAT” or “FM” button). To eject one compact disc only: Push and player reaches the end of a tape side, it
XM satellite radio*— release the compact disc eject button. If automatically reverses and begins to play
you hold the button too long (if the audio the other side. This is true whether the
These buttons are used to preset and
system is on at this time, you hear a cassette was playing or fast forwarding.
tune in radio channels.
beep.), the mechanism will change to the
To preset a channel to a button: Tune in mode for ejecting all the discs loaded in
the desired channel. (See “AUDIO- TUNE” the changer. You can also eject any spe-
or “SEEK TRACK”.) Push and hold down cific one of the discs loaded in the player
the button until you hear a beep—this will as follows:
set the channel to the button. The preset
button number will appear on the display. 1. Push either side of the “ƝDISCƜ”
button until the number of the disc you
want to eject is displayed.

173
 (Reverse/Fast forward buttons) AM button Manual tuning function—
Cassette Player Push “AM·SAT” to turn on the radio and Turn the knob. The radio will step up or
select the AM band. “AM” will appear on down to another frequency.
Push the fast forward button to fast for- the display.
ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on XM satellite radio*—
the display. Push the reverse button to If the audio system is off, you can turn Turn the knob. The radio will step up or
rewind a tape. “REW” will appear on the on the radio by pushing “AM”. Also, push down the channel.
display. “AM” to switch from cassette or compact
disc operation to radio operation. *: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner
To stop the tape while it is fast forward- and service. Contact your Toyota dealer
ing, push the fast forward button or AUDIO- TUNE Knob for details.
“TAPE”; to stop the tape while it is re- This knob is used to adjust the tone and DISC (Compact Disc) button
winding, push the reverse button or balance or to tune the station manually on
“TAPE”. the radio mode. Push “DISC” to switch from radio or cas-
sette operation to compact disc operation.
If a tape side rewinds completely, the cas- Tone and sound balance adjustment func- If the audio system is off, you can turn
sette player will stop and then play that tion— on the compact disc player by pushing
same side. If a tape fast forwards com- Each time you push the “AUDIO- TUNE” “DISC”. In both cases, a disc must alrea-
pletely, the cassette player will play the knob, the display changes as in the fol- dy be loaded in the player.
other side of the tape, using the auto- re- lowing. To adjust the tone and balance or
verse feature. When the audio is set into compact disc
turn on or off the automatic sound leveliz- operation, the display shows the track or,
Compact Disc Player er, turn the knob. track and disc number currently being
If you want to fast forward or reverse BAS: Adjusts low- pitched tones. played.
through a compact disc track, push and MID: Adjusts mid- pitched tones. If the player or another unit equipped with
hold in the fast forward or reverse button. the player malfunctions, your audio system
When you release the button, the compact TRE: Adjusts high- pitched tones.
will display one of the four following error
disc player will resume playing. BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between messages.
the right and left speakers.
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between
the front and rear speakers.

174
If “WAIT” appears on the display, it indi- Dolbyr B NR∗ LOAD button
cates that the inside of the player unit If you are listening to a tape that was This button is used to load the compact
may be too hot due to the very high ambi- discs in the compact disc auto changer
recorded with Dolbyr B Noise Reduction,
ent temperature. Remove the disc from which is integrated with the radio and cas-
the player and allow the player to cool push the “ ” button. The “ ” will ap-
sette player. This compact disc auto
down. pear on the display. Push the button again changer can store up to 6 discs.
If “ERROR 1” appears on the display, to turn off Dolbyr B NR.
The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”
it indicates the disc is dirty, damaged or The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise position.
label face down. Clean the disc or insert by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-
it correctly. tion, play your tapes with this button on Loading one compact disc only—
If “ERROR 3” or “ERROR 4” appears or off according to the mode used for To load one compact disc only, quickly
on the display, it indicates there is a recording the tape. push and release the button. If you hold
∗ : Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from the button too long (if the audio system
trouble inside the system. Eject the disc.
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the is on at this time, you hear a beep.), the
Set the disc again. double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation. mechanism will change to the mode for
If the malfunction is not rectified, take loading multiple compact discs. After
your vehicle to your Toyota dealer. FM button
pushing the button, insert a compact disc.
DISC ƝƜ Push “FM” to turn on the radio and select At this time, the indicators on both sides
the FM band. “FM1” or “FM2” will appear of the slot are flashing. After the disc is
By using this button, you can select a
on the display. This system allows you to loaded, the shutter of the slot will close
disc you wish to listen to.
set six stations in FM1 and six stations and the indicators will stop flashing.
Push either side of the button until the in FM2.
number of the disc you want to listen to If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
If the audio system is off, you can turn will close after 15 seconds.
appears on the display.
on the radio by pushing “FM”. Also, push
“FM” to switch from cassette or compact
disc operation to radio operation.

175
Loading multiple compact discs— RAND (Random) RDS (Radio Data System) display
To load multiple compact discs, push and There are two random features—you can The radio will automatically switch to the
hold (until you hear a beep when the au- either listen to the tracks on all the com- RDS mode to receive an RDS station
dio system is on). After pushing the but- pact discs in the player in random order, while turned to FM broadcasts. “RDS” will
ton, insert the first compact disc. At this or only listen to the tracks on a specific appear on the display.
time, the indicators on both sides of the compact disc in random order. RPT (Repeat)
slot are flashing. After the disc is loaded, To randomly play for the tracks on a disc:
the shutter of the slot will close and the Cassette Player
Quickly push and release “ ”. “ ”
indicators will stop flashing. After a few Push “ ” while the track is playing.
will appear on the display. The disc you
seconds, the shutter will automatically “ ” will appear on the display. When
are listening to will play in random order.
open again so the next disc can be in-
If you hear a beep, you held the button the track ends, it will automatically be
serted. The same process can be applied
too long, and the player will play all the rewound and replayed. This process will
for loading the rest of the discs. be continued until you push the button
tracks in the player in random order. To
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter turn off the random feature, push this but- again to turn off the repeat feature.
will close after 15 seconds. ton again. There must be at least 3 seconds of blank
PWR·VOL (Power and Volume) knob To randomly play for all the tracks in the space between tracks in order for the re-
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system player: peat feature to work correctly.
on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the Push and hold “ ” until you hear a
volume. beep. “ ” will appear on the dis-
play and the player will perform all the
tracks on all the discs in the player in
random order. To turn off the random fea-
ture, push this button again.

176
Compact Disc Player SAT* (Satellite radio) D The premium channel you selected is
There are two repeat features—You can Push the “AM·SAT” button to turn on the not authorized. Wait for about 2 sec-
either replay a disc track or a whole com- radio and select the XM band. “SAT1”, onds until the radio returns to the pre-
pact disc. “SAT2” or “SAT3” will appear on the dis- vious channel or “CH001”. If it does
play. This system allows you to set eigh- not change automatically, select anoth-
Repeating a track: er channel. If you want to listen to the
teen XM channels, three for each of the
Quickly push and release “ ” while the premium channel, contact the XM satel-
preset button.
track is playing. “ ” will appear on the lite radio.
Error messages
display. If you hear a beep, you held the “NO SIGNAL”: The XM signal is too
button too long, and the player will repeat If the satellite radio tuner malfunction, weak at the current location. Wait until
the whole disc. When the track ends, it your audio system will display one of the your vehicle reaches a location with a
will automatically be replayed. This pro- six following error messages. stronger signal.
cess will be continued until you push the “ANTENNA”:
button again to turn off the repeat feature. “LOADING”: The unit is acquiring audio
D The XM antenna is not connected. or program information. Wait until the unit
Repeating a disc: Check whether the XM antenna cable has received the information.
Push and hold “ ” until you hear a is attached securely. “OFF AIR”: The channel you selected is
beep. “ ” will appear on the display. D A short- circuit occurs in the antenna or not broadcasting any programming. Select
The player will repeat all the tracks on the the surrounding antenna cable. See a another channel.
disc you are listening to. When the disc Toyota certified dealer. “– – –”: The channel you selected is no
ends, the player will automatically go back
“UPDATING”: longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds
to the first track on the disc and replay.
D You have not subscribed to the XM until the radio returns to the previous
This process will be continued until you channel or “CH001”. If it does not change
push the button again to turn off the re- satellite radio. The radio is being up-
dated with the latest encryption code. automatically, select another channel.
peat feature.
Contact the XM satellite radio for sub- The XM Listener Care Center is also
scription information. When a contact is available on the phone, please call (800)
canceled, you can choose the “CH000” 852- 9696 during the following hours:
and all free- to- air channels. Monday – Saturday: 7 a.m. – 1 a.m.
Sunday: 12 p.m. – 12 a.m.

177
*: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner XM satellite radio*— Compact Disc Player
and service. Contact your Toyota dealer You can either scan the currently selected There are two scan features—you can ei-
for details. channel category or scan only the preset ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or
SCAN button channels for that band. scan the first tracks of all the discs in the
Radio To scan the preset channels: player.

You can either scan all the frequencies on Push and hold the “SCAN” button until Scanning the tracks on a disc:
a band or scan only the preset stations you hear a beep. “SCAN” appears on the Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”
for that band. display. The radio will tune in the next will appear on the display and the player
preset channel up the band, stay there for will scan all the tracks on the disc you
To scan the preset stations: 5 seconds, and then move to the next are listening to. If you hear a beep, you
Push and hold “SCAN” until you hear a preset channel. To stop scanning, push held the button too long, and the player
beep. The radio will tune in the next pres- this button again. will scan the first track of all the discs in
et station up the band, stay there for 5 the player. To select a track, push “SCAN”
seconds, and then move to the next pre- To scan the currently selected channel
category: again. If the player scanned all the tracks
set station. To select a station, push on the disc, it will stop scanning.
“SCAN” again. Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-
ton. “SCAN” appears on the display. The Scanning the first track of all the discs in
To scan all the frequencies: radio will find the next channel in the the player:
Quickly push and release “SCAN”. If you same channel category up the band, stay Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.
hear a beep, you held the button too long, there for 5 seconds, and then scan again. “ ·SCAN” will appear on the display
and the radio will scan the preset sta- To stop scanning, push this button again.
tions. The radio will find the next station and the player will perform the first track
up the station band, stay there for 5 se- *: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner of the next disc. To select a disc, push
conds, and then scan again. To select a and service. Contact your Toyota dealer the “SCAN” again. If the player has
station, push “SCAN” again. for details. scanned all the discs, it will stop scan-
ning.

178
SEEK TRACK button When counting the number of tracks you Compact Disc Player
Radio want to rewind, remember to count the By using this button, you can skip up or
current track as well. For example, if you down to a different track.
In the seek mode, the radio finds and want to rewind to a song that is two be-
plays the next station up or down the fore the song you are listening to, push Push either side of the “SEEK TRACK”
station band. on the left side of the button until “REW button until the number of the track you
To seek a station, quickly push and re- 3” appears on the display. want to listen to appears on the display.
lease the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”. Do this again to If you want to return to the beginning of
If you have pushed the track button more the current track, push the left side of the
find another station. than you wanted to, push the other side button one time, quickly.
XM satellite radio*— of the button. The track number will be
reduced. ST (Stereo reception) display
To select the next channel within the cur-
rent channel category, push the “Ɯ” or The track number you select is not valid Your radio automatically changes to stereo
“Ɲ” side of the “SEEK TRACK” button. if it is higher than the number of tracks reception when a stereo broadcast is re-
Repeat until a desired channel is found. remaining on the current cassette side. ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces
*: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner D After the beginning of the tape is the amount of channel separation to prev-
and service. Contact your Toyota dealer reached, the player will automatically ent the weak signal from creating noise.
for details. start playing the same side. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the
Cassette Player D After the end of the tape is reached, radio switches from stereo to mono recep-
By using this button, you can skip up or the player will automatically reverse tion.
down to a different track. sides and start playing the other side. TAPE button
You can skip up to nine tracks at a time. There must be at least 3 seconds of blank Push “TAPE” to switch from radio or com-
space between tracks for the track button pact disc operation to cassette operation.
Push the right or left side of the button. to work correctly. In addition, the feature
“FF 1” or “REW 1” will appear on the If the audio system is off, you can turn
may not work well with some spoken on the cassette player by pushing “TAPE”.
display. word, live, or classical recordings. In both cases, a cassette must already be
Next, push either side of the “SEEK loaded in the player.
TRACK” button until the number on the
display reaches the number of tracks you
want to skip. If you push the button ten
times, the skip feature will be turned off.
179
TEXT button Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can be Compact disc player
Radio displayed. (Some information will not be This button is used to change the display
fully displayed.) for the compact disc that contains text
This button is operational only in RDS
mode. The message display will be canceled if data.
any button that affects the display is To change the display, quickly push and
To display the station name and text mes- pushed.
sage, push this button while “RDS” ap- release the “TEXT” button while the com-
pears on the display. Each time you push If there is no song/program title or artist pact disc is playing. The display changes
the button, indication on the display will name/feature associated with the channel in the order from the elapsed time to disc
change from the band to the station name at that time, “– – – – –” will appear on title to track title, then back to the
to radio text in this order. After 6 seconds the display. elapsed time.
passes, indication returns to the band. This XM tuner supports “Audio Services” If this button is pushed while a compact
If the radio receives a radio text from (Music and Talk) of only XM satellite radio disc that does not contain text data is
RDS station, “MSG” appears on the dis- and “Text Information”* 2 linked to the re- playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the
play. Push the button, and a text message spective audio services. display.
is displayed. * 1 : Use of satellite radio requires XM tun- If the entire disc or track title does not
If the entire the message is not displayed, er and service. Contact your Toyota appear on the display, push and hold the
“"” will appear on the display. To display dealer for details. button until you hear a beep. The rest of
the rest of the message, push and hold * 2 : Text information includes, Channel the title will appear.
the button until you hear a beep. Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title and
After the entire message has been dis- Category Name.
played, the message will disappear.
XM satellite radio* 1 —
When you push the “TEXT” button, the
display changes as follows:
CH NAME → TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM
TITLE) → NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEA-
TURE) → CH NUMBER → CH NAME

180
 Audio system operating hints
TRAF (Traffic announcement function) D MISC
NOTICE
button D ALERT (Emergency message)
When you push the “TRAF” button, “TRAF To ensure correct audio system op-
With the program type displayed, push the
SEEK” appears on the display and the erations:
“SEEK/TRACK” or “SCAN” button. You can
radio will start seeking any traffic program seek or scan for the station broad casting z Be careful not to spill beverages
station. the same type of program. over the audio system.
If no traffic program station is found, “NO XM satellite radio*— z Do not put anything other than a
TRAF INFO” appears on the display for a cassette tape or Compact Disc into
few seconds and the display returns to When you push the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of
the slot.
the previous mode. the “TYPE” button while receiving a XM
channel, the current channel category ap- z The use of a cellular phone inside
TYPE (Program type) button pears on the display. or near the vehicle may cause a
When you push this button, the current noise from the speakers of the au-
When the channel category appears, push
program type receiving from RDS station dio system which you are listening
either “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “TYPE” but-
appears on the display. to. However, this does not indicate
ton to switch to the next or previous cate-
a malfunction.
If the system receives no RDS stations, gory.
“NO PTY” appears on the display. *: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner
RADIO RECEPTION
Each time you push the “Ɲ” or “Ɯ”, the and service. Contact your Toyota dealer
program type changes as in the following: for details. Usually, a problem with radio reception
does not mean there is a problem with
D ROCK
your radio—it is just the normal result of
D EASY LIS (Easy listening) conditions outside the vehicle.
D CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and jazz) For example, nearby buildings and terrain
D R&B (Rhythm and Blues) can interfere with FM reception. Power
lines or telephone wires can interfere with
D INFORM (Information)
AM signals. And of course, radio signals
D RELIGION have a limited range. The farther you are
from a station, the weaker its signal will
be. In addition, reception conditions
change constantly as your vehicle moves.

181
Here are some common reception prob- AM
NOTICE
lems that probably do not indicate a prob- Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected by
lem with your radio: the upper atmosphere—especially at night. This equipment has been tested and
FM These reflected signals can interfere with found to comply with the limits for a
those received directly from the radio sta- class B digital device, pursuant to
Fading and drifting stations—Generally, the
tion, causing the radio station to sound Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These lim-
effective range of FM is about 40 km (25
alternately strong and weak. its are designed to provide reasonable
miles). Once outside this range, you may
protection against harmful interfer-
notice fading and drifting, which increase Station interference—When a reflected sig-
ence in a residential installation. This
with the distance from the radio transmit- nal and a signal received directly from a
equipment generates, uses and can
ter. They are often accompanied by distor- radio station are very nearly the same
radiate radio frequency energy and, if
tion. frequency, they can interfere with each
not installed and used in accordance
Multi- path—FM signals are reflective, other, making it difficult to hear the broad-
with the instructions, may cause
making it possible for two signals to reach cast.
harmful interference to radio commu-
your antenna at the same time. If this Static—AM is easily affected by external nications. However, there is no guar-
happens, the signals will cancel each oth- sources of electrical noise, such as high antee that interference will not occur
er out, causing a momentary flutter or tension power lines, lightening, or electri- in a particular installation.
loss of reception. cal motors. This results in static.
Static and fluttering—These occur when XM*
signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or Alternation or modification carried out
other large objects. Increasing the bass without appropriate authorization may in-
level may reduce static and fluttering. validate the user’s right to operate the
Station swapping—If the FM signal you equipment.
are listening to is interrupted or weak- *: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner
ened, and there is another strong station and service. Contact your Toyota dealer
nearby on the FM band, your radio may for details.
tune in the second station until the origi-
nal signal can be picked up again.

182
 CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER D Avoid using cassettes with a total play-
If this equipment does cause harmful AND TAPES ing time longer than 100 minutes (50
interference to radio or television re- minutes per side). The tape used in
ception, which can be determined by For the best performance for your cas-
sette player and tapes: these cassettes is thin and could get
turning the equipment off and on, the stuck or tangled in the cassette player.
user is encouraged to try to correct Clean the tape head and other parts regu-
the interference by one or more of larly.
the following measures: D A dirty tape head or tape path can
—Reorient or relocate the receiving decrease sound quality and tangle your
antenna. cassette tapes. The easiest way to
—Increase the separation between the clean them is by using a cleaning tape.
equipment and receiver. (A wet type is recommended.)
—Connect the equipment into an out- Use high- quality cassettes.
let on a circuit different from that to D Low- quality cassette tapes can cause
which the receiver is connected. many problems, including poor sound,
—Consult the dealer or an experi- inconsistent playing speed, and
enced radio/TV technician for help. constant auto- reversing. They can also
get stuck or tangled in the cassette
player.
NOTICE D Do not use a cassette if it has been
damaged or tangled or if its label is
This XM tuner supports “Audio Ser-
peeling off.
vices” (Music and Talk) of only XM
satellite radio and “Text Information”* D Do not leave a cassette in the player
linked to the respective audio ser- if you are not listening to it, especially
vices. if it is hot outside.
*Text Information includes, Channel D Store cassettes in their cases and out
Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title and of direct sunlight.
Category Name.

183
CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISC
PLAYER AND DISCS
D The player is intended for use with 12
cm (4.7 in.) discs only.
D Extremely high temperatures can keep
your compact disc player from working.
On hot days, use the air conditioning
to cool the vehicle interior before you
listen to a disc.
D Bumpy roads or other vibrations may
make your compact disc player skip.
D If moisture gets into your compact disc
player, you may not hear any sound Special shaped discs
even though your compact disc player D Use only compact discs marked as
appears to be working. Remove the shown above. The following products
disc from the player and wait until it may not be playable on your compact
dries. disc player.
Copy- protected CD
CAUTION CD- R (CD- Recordable)
CD- RW (CD- Re- writable)
Compact disc players use an invisible CD- ROM
laser beam which could cause hazard- Z17058
ous radiation exposure if directed
outside the unit. Be sure to operate
the player correctly.

Transparent/translucent discs

184
 NOTICE
Do not use special shaped, transpar-
ent/translucent, low quality or labeled
discs such as those shown in the il-
lustrations. The use of such discs
may damage the player or changer, or
it may be impossible to eject the
disc.

Correct Wrong

Low quality discs

D Handle compact discs carefully, espe-
cially when you are inserting them.
Hold them on the edge and do not
bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints
on them, particularly on the shiny side.
D Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or
other disc damage could cause the
player to skip or to repeat a section of
a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the
disc up to the light.)
D Remove discs from the compact disc
player when you are not listening to
them. Store them in their plastic cases
away from moisture, heat, and direct
sunlight.
Labeled discs

185
 Rear seat audio system
(b) When the radio mode is selected
“ CH ” button: Push this button to
select a preset station on the preset but-
ton of the front audio system. Each push
of the button changes to the station with
higher numbered preset button.
17c529 “ TUNE ” button: Push this button
for manual tuning or seek tuning.
D Push this button briefly. Each time you
push the button, the radio will step up
or down to another frequency.
D Push this button and hold it until you
hear a beep. The radio will begin seek-
To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a In the rear seat, you can enjoy a differ- ing up or down for a station, and will
soft, lint- free cloth that has been damp- ent mode from the one used on the stop on reception. Each time you push
ened with water. Wipe in a straight line front audio system, using headphones. the button, the stations will be
from the center to the edge of the disc (a) Turning the system on and off searched automatically one after anoth-
(not in circles). Dry it with another soft, er.
lint- free cloth. Do not use a conventional “ON/SOURCE” button: Use this button to
record cleaner or anti- static device. turn system on when the system is off.
When the system is turned on, the mode
changes by pushing this button.
“OFF” button: Use this button to turn off
the system.
“Volume adjusting” knob: Use this knob
to adjust the volume.

186
 Audio remote controls
(steering switches)
(c) When the “TAPE” mode is selected (e) Some basics
“ PROG ” button: Push this button This system cannot be used if the audio
to select the other side of a cassette system is not turned on.
tape. You cannot select “AM” or “FM” mode in
“ TRACK ” button: Push the left or the rear seat if the “FM” or “AM” mode
right side to skip forward or backward to is used on the front seats side.
locate the song you want to hear. For If you select the same mode as the front
details, see “SEEK TRACK button” on seats side, operating the controller will
page 179. affect the mode on the front seats side.
(d) When the “CD” or “DVD” mode is Vehicles with navigation system only:
selected
D When the XM satellite radio* is se-
“ DISC ” button: Use this button to lected in the front seat, the “CD” or
search a desired disc. “DVD” mode cannot be selected in the
The switches are installed on the left side
“ TRACK ” button: Use this button rear seat.
of the steering wheel.
to search a desired track or push this D When the “CD” or “DVD” mode is se-
button and hold it to fast forward or rever- “MODE” switch: Use this switch to
lected in the rear seat, selecting the
se. change the mode. If a tape or compact
XM satellite radio* in the front seat will
disc is not inserted, the “TAPE” or “CD”
automatically change the “CD” or
mode is skipped. When you push the
“DVD” to “AM” mode in the rear seat.
switch with the audio system turned off,
the audio system turns on.
CAUTION
“ ” switches: Use this switches to ad-
This system is not designed for a just the volume. Push “+” to increase the
driver. So, the driver should not use volume and “–” to decrease the volume.
this system while driving. The volume continues to increase or de-
crease while the switch is being pressed.

187
(a) When the radio mode is selected (b) When the “TAPE” mode is selected (c) When the “CD” or “DVD” mode is
“ ” or “ ” switch: Push this switch for “ ” or “ ” switch: Push this switch to selected
seek tuning or to select a station. fast forward or rewind the tape or for “ ” or “ ” switch: Use this switch to
D To select a preset station, push the automatic program selection. select a desired track or disc.
switch briefly. Do this again to select D Push this switch until you hear a beep D Push this switch briefly to select a de-
the next preset station. to fast forward or rewind the tape. To sired track.
D To seek a station, push and hold the stop fast forwarding or rewinding, push D To select a desired disc, push and hold
switch until you hear a beep. Do this the same side on the switch until you this switch until the desired number of
again to find the next station. If you hear a beep. the disc appears and you hear a beep.
push the switch on either side of the D Push this switch briefly for automatic
“Ɲ” or “Ɯ” during the seek mode, program selection. When automatically CAUTION
seeking will be canceled. selecting a program, you can skip up
D To step up or down the frequency, to 9 programs at a time. For details, Operate the switches with due care
push and hold the switch even after see “SEEK TRACK button” on page while you are driving to avoid acci-
you hear a beep. When you release 179. dents.
from the switch, the radio will begin
seeking up or down for a station. Do
this again to find the next station.
XM satellite radio*—
To select a preset channel, push the “Ɯ”
or “Ɲ” side of the switch. Repeat until a
desired channel is found.
*: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner
and service. Contact your Toyota dealer
for details.

188
 SECTION 1- 9
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Air conditioning system
Front air conditioning system:
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Air flow selector settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Instrument panel vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Rear air conditioning system:
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Air flow selector settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to the

separate “ Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

189
Front air conditioning system—
—Controls
1. Temperature selector knob
2. “AUTO” button
3. Temperature display
4. Fan speed display
5. Air flow display
6. “MODE” button
7. “A/C” button
8. Windshield air flow button
9. Fan speed control button
10. Air intake control button
11. “OFF” button

190
“AUTO” button “MAX COLD” appears when you adjust to
For automatic operation of the air condi- maximum cooling, and “MAX HOT” ap-
tioning, press the “AUTO” button. An indi- pears when you adjust to maximum warm-
cator light will illuminate to show that the ing.
automatic operation mode has been se- “OFF” button
lected. Push the button to turn off the air condi-
In the automatic operation mode, the air tioning system.
conditioning selects the most suitable fan
speed and air flow according to the tem-
perature.
You may use manual controls if you want
to select your own settings.
To turn off the automatic operation, press
the “MODE” or fan speed control button. “MODE” button
Fan speed control button Push the button to select the vents used
for air flow.
Push the “Ɯ” (increase) or “Ɲ” (decrease)
button to adjust the fan speed. In automatic operation, you do not have
to select the air flow unless you desire
In automatic operation, you do not have another air flow mode.
to adjust the fan speed unless you desire
another fan speed mode. 1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the
instrument panel vents.
Temperature selector knob
2. Bi- level—Air flows from both the floor
To increase the temperature, turn the knob
vents and the instrument panel vents.
to right side, to decrease it, turn the knob
to left side. 3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor
vents.
It is recommended that you close the
lower vent. For details about this, see
“Instrument panel vents” described be-
low.
191
4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainly When the “A/C” button is not pressed in,
from the floor vents and windshield pressing “MODE” button turns off the air
vents. conditioning.
It is recommended that you close the For details about air flow selector setting,
lower vent. For details about this, see see “Air flow selector settings” described
“Instrument panel vents” described be- below.
low.
For details about air flow selector settings,
see “Air flow selector settings” described
below.

Windshield air flow button

When this button is pressed, air flows
mainly from the windshield vents.
Pressing the button once again returns the
air flow mode to the last one used.
Pressing the windshield air flow button
turns on the defroster- linked air condition-
ing. At this time, the “A/C” button indicator
comes on when the air intake control is
in recirculate mode regardless of whether
or not the “A/C” button is pressed in. This
is to clean up the front view more quickly.
To turn off the air conditioning alone,
press the “A/C” button once again.

192
 “A/C” button
To turn on the air conditioning, press the
“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator
will come on. To turn the air conditioning
off, press the button again.
If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there
is a problem in the air conditioning system
and the air conditioning automatically
shuts off. If this happens, take your ve-
hicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

Air intake control button

Press the button to select the air source.
An indicator light will illuminate to show
which air intake mode is being selected.
1. Recirculate—Recirculates the air inside
the vehicle.
2. Fresh—Draws outside air into the sys-
tem.

193
—Air flow selector settings

17C001a

See “Instrument panel vents” described below.

194
—Operating tips
D To cool off your Toyota after it has D If following another vehicle on a dusty Heating
been parked in the hot sun, drive with road, or driving in windy and dusty For best results, set controls to:
the windows open for a few minutes. conditions, it is recommended that the
This vents the hot air, allowing the air air intake control button be temporarily
Fan speed—“AUTO”
conditioning to cool the interior more set to RECIRCULATE, which will close
Temperature— To the desired
quickly. off the outside passage and prevent
temperature
D Make sure the air intake grilles in front outside air and dust from entering the
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
of the windshield are not blocked (by vehicle interior.
Air flow—“AUTO”
leaves or snow, for example). Lower vent—CLOSED
D On humid days, do not blow cold air Air conditioning—OFF
on the windshield. The windshield could
fog up because of the difference in air D For quick heating, select recirculated
temperature on the inside and outside air for a few minutes. To keep the
of the windshield. windows from fogging, select fresh af-
ter the vehicle interior has been war-
D Keep the area under the front seats med.
clear to allow air to circulate through-
out the vehicle. D Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-
fied heating.
D On cold days, set the fan speed to
high for a minute to help clear the D Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat
intake ducts of snow or moisture. This the vehicle interior while defrosting or
can reduce the amount of fogging on defogging the windshield.
the windows.
D When driving on dusty roads, close all
windows. If dust thrown up by the ve-
hicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended
that the air intake control button be set
to FRESH and the fan speed control
button to any setting except “OFF”.

195
Air conditioning Defogging Defrosting
For best results, set controls to: The inside of the windshield The outside of the windshield
For best results, set controls to: For best results, set controls to:
Fan speed—“AUTO”
Temperature— To the desired Temperature— Towards high temperature Temperature—Towards high temperature
temperature to heat; Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air) low temperature to cool Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Air flow—“AUTO” Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Lower vent—CLOSED
Air conditioning—ON Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Lower vent—CLOSED When pressing the windshield air flow but-
D For quick cooling, select recirculated ton, the air intake selects “Fresh” auto-
air for a few minutes. When pressing the windshield air flow but- matically. This is to clean up the front
Ventilation ton, the air intake selects “Fresh” auto- view more quickly.
For best results, set controls to: matically. This is to clean up the front Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
view more quickly. heating or cooling. This setting clears the
Fan speed—“AUTO” Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified front view more quickly.
Temperature— To the desired heating or cooling. This setting clears the D To heat the vehicle interior while de-
temperature front view more quickly. frosting the windshield, choose
Air intake—FRESH (outside air) D On humid days, do not blow cold air floor/windshield air flow.
Air flow—“AUTO” on the windshield—the difference be-
Air conditioning—OFF tween the outside and inside tempera-
tures could make the fogging worse.

196
—Instrument panel vents

Center vents Lower vent

If air flow control is not satisfactory, check

the instrument panel vents. The instrument
panel vents may be opened or closed as
shown.
For removing frost or fog, it is recom-
mended that you close the lower vent
when you use the “Floor”, the “Floor/Wind-
shield” or the “Windshield” mode.

Side vents

197
Rear air conditioning system—
—Controls
1. Rear air conditioning on- off switch
2. “AUTO” button
3. Air flow selector
4. Fan speed selector
5. Temperature selector
6. “OFF” button

18c507b

198
Rear air conditioning on- off switch Temperature selector
To turn the rear air conditioning on, press Move the lever to adjust the tempera-
the “REAR” switch. To turn the rear air ture—to the right to warm, to the left to
conditioning off, press the switch again. cool.
“AUTO” button “OFF” button
For automatic operation of the rear air Push the button to turn off the rear air
conditioning, press the “AUTO” button. An conditioning system.
indicator light will illuminate to show that
the automatic operation mode has been
selected.
In the automatic operation mode, the rear
air conditioning selects the most suitable
fan speed and air flow according to the
temperature. Air flow selector
You may use manual controls if you want Press one of the buttons to select the
to select your own settings. vents used for air flow. An indicator light
will illuminate to show which air flow
Fan speed selector
mode is being selected.
Press the buttons to adjust the fan speed. In automatic operation, you do not have
In automatic operation, you do not have to select the air flow unless you desire
to adjust the fan speed unless you desire another air flow mode.
another fan speed mode. 1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the roof
vents.
2. Bi- level—Air flows from both the floor
vents and the roof vents.
3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor
vents.
Air at higher than room temperature does
not flow from the roof vents.
199
—Air flow selector settings

18c508a

Warm air
Cool air
200
 SECTION 2
INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING
YOUR TOYOTA
Off- road vehicle precautionss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Break- in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Fuel pump shut off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Three- way catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Engine exhaust cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Facts about engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Iridium- tipped spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Rear step bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Limited- slip differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Your Toyota’s identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Tire information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Vehicle load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Cargo and luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

223
Off- road vehicle precautions
This vehicle belongs to the utility ve-
hicle class, which has higher ground CAUTION
clearance and narrower tread in relation
to the height of its center of gravity to Always observe the following precau-
make it capable of performing in a wide tions to help minimize the risk of se-
variety of off- road applications. Specif- rious personal injury or damage to
ic design characteristics give it a high- your vehicle:
er center of gravity than ordinary pas- D In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-
senger cars. This vehicle design son is significantly more likely to
feature causes this type of vehicle to die than a person wearing a seat
be more likely to rollover. And, utility belt. Therefore, the driver and all
vehicles have a significantly higher rol- passengers should fasten their seat
lover rate than other types of vehicles. belts whenever the vehicle is mov-
An advantage of the higher ground ing.
clearance is a better view of the road
allowing you to anticipate problems. It
D Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-
vers, if at all possible. Failure to
is not designed for cornering at the
operate this vehicle correctly may
same speeds as ordinary passenger
result in loss of control or vehicle
cars any more than low- slung sports
rollover causing death or serious
cars designed to perform satisfactorily
injury.
under off- road conditions. Therefore,
sharp turns at excessive speeds may D Loading cargo on the roof luggage
cause rollover. carrier will make the center of the
vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high
speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,
sudden braking or abrupt maneu-
vers, otherwise it may result in loss
of control or vehicle rollover due to
failure to operate this vehicle cor-
rectly.

224
 Break- in period Fuel
Drive gently and avoid high speeds. FUEL TYPE
D Always slow down in gusty cross-
Your vehicle does not need an elaborate Your new vehicle must use only un-
winds. Because of its profile and
break- in. But following a few simple tips leaded gasoline.
higher center of gravity, your ve-
hicle is more sensitive to side for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add To help prevent gas station mix- ups, your
to the future economy and long life of Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.
winds than an ordinary passenger
your vehicle: The special nozzle on pumps with un-
car. Slowing down will allow you
to have better control. D Avoid full- throttle acceleration when leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-
starting and driving. dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will
D When driving off- road or in rugged
terrain, do not drive at excessive D Avoid racing the engine. not.
speeds, jump, make sharp turns, D Try to avoid hard stops during the first At a minimum, the gasoline you use
strike objects, etc. This may cause 300 km (200 miles). should meet the specifications of ASTM
loss of control or vehicle rollover D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5- M93
causing death or serious injury. D Do not drive for a long time at any in Canada.
You are also risking expensive dam- single speed, either fast or slow.
age to your vehicle’s suspension D Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 NOTICE
and chassis. km (500 miles).
Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of
D Do not drive horizontally across leaded gasoline will cause the three-
steep slopes. Driving straight up way catalytic converter to lose its ef-
or straight down is preferred. Your fectiveness, the emission control sys-
vehicle (or any similar off- road ve- tem to function improperly, and dam-
hicle) can tip over sideways much age to the engine. Also, this can in-
more easily than forward or back- crease maintenance costs.
ward.

225
OCTANE RATING GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENT Toyota recommends the use of cleaner
Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Oc- ADDITIVES burning gasoline and appropriately blended
tane Number 91) or higher. For im- Toyota recommends the use of gasoline reformulated gasoline. These types of gas-
proved vehicle performance, the use of that contains detergent additives to oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-
premium unleaded gasoline with an Oc- avoid build- up of engine deposits. mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-
tane Rating of 91 (Research Octane prove air quality.
However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.
Number 96) or higher is recommended. contains detergent additives to keep clean OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE
Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane and/or clean intake systems. Toyota allows the use of oxygenate
rating or research octane number lower QUALITY GASOLINE blended gasoline where the oxygenate
than stated above will cause persistent content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%
heavy knocking. If it is severe, this will Automotive manufacturers in the U.S., MTBE. If you use gasohol in your Toyota,
lead to engine damage. Europe and Japan have developed a be sure that it has an octane rating no low-
specification for quality fuel named er than 87.
If your engine knocks... World- Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that
If you detect heavy knocking even when is expected to be applied world wide. Toyota does not recommend the use of
using the recommended fuel, or if you The WWFC consists of four categories gasoline containing methanol.
hear steady knocking while holding a that depend on required emission lev- GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT
steady speed on level roads, consult your els. In the U.S., category 3 has been Some gasoline contain an octane en-
Toyota dealer. adopted. The WWFC improves air quali- hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-
However, occasionally, you may notice ty by providing for better emissions in clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
light knocking for a short time while accel- vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction
through better vehicle performance. Toyota does not recommend the use of
erating or driving up hills. This is normal gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-
and there is no need for concern. CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE taining MMT is used, your emission con-
Cleaner burning gasoline, including re- trol system may be adversely affected.
formulated gasoline that contains oxy- The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-
genates such as ethanol or MTBE is strument cluster may come on. If this hap-
available in many areas. pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-
vice.

226
 Fuel pump shut off system Operation in foreign countries
GASOLINE QUALITY The fuel pump shut off system stops sup- If you plan to drive your Toyota in
In a very few cases, you may experience plying fuel to the engine when the engine another country...
driveability problems caused by the partic- stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision. First, comply with the vehicle registration
ular gasoline that you are using. If you To restart the engine after the fuel pump laws.
continue to have unacceptable driveability, shut off system activates, turn the ignition
switch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and start Second, confirm the availability of the
try changing gasoline brands. If that does correct fuel (unleaded and minimum oc-
not rectify your problem, then consult your it.
tane number).
Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
NOTICE
Inspect the ground under the vehicle
z Do not use gasohol other than before restarting the engine. If you
stated above. It will cause fuel sys- find that liquid has leaked onto the
tem damage or vehicle performance ground, it is the fuel system has
problems. been damaged and it is in need of
z If drive ability problems are occur repair. In this case, do not restart the
(poor hot starting, vaporizing, en- engine.
gine knock, etc.), discontinue the
use.
z Take care not to spill gasohol dur-
ing refueling. Gasohol may cause
paint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

96 L (25.4 gal., 21.1 Imp.gal.)

227
Three- way catalytic converter

D Do not idle or park your vehicle z Avoid racing the engine.

over anything that might burn easi- z Do not push- start or pull- start your
ly such as grass, leaves, paper or vehicle.
rags.
z Do not turn off the ignition while

i20018a NOTICE
the vehicle is moving.
z Keep your engine in good running
order. Malfunctions in the engine
A large amount of unburned gases electrical system, electric ignition
flowing into the three- way catalytic system or fuel system could cause
converter may cause it to overheat an extremely high three- way cata-
and create a fire hazard. To prevent lytic converter temperature.
this and other damage, observe the z If the engine becomes difficult to
following precautions: start or stalls frequently, take your
The three- way catalytic converter is the
emission control devices installed in z Use only unleaded gasoline. vehicle in for a check- up as soon
the exhaust system. z Do not drive with an extremely low as possible. Remember, your Toyota
fuel level; running out of fuel could dealer knows your vehicle and its
Its purpose is to reduce pollutants in the three- way catalytic converter sys-
exhaust gas. cause the engine to misfire, creat-
ing an excessive load on the three- tem best.
way catalytic converter.
CAUTION
z Do not allow the engine to run at
D Keep people and combustible mate- idle speed for more than 20 min-
rials away from the exhaust pipe utes.
while the engine is running. The
exhaust gas is very hot.

228
 Engine exhaust cautions
z To ensure that the three- way cata- CAUTION D Keep the back door and quarter
lytic converter and the entire emis- windows closed while driving. An
sion control system operate proper- D Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust. open or unsealed back door and
ly, your vehicle must receive the It contains carbon monoxide, which quarter windows may cause exhaust
periodic inspections required by the is a colorless and odorless gas. It gases to be drawn into the vehicle.
Toyota Maintenance Schedule. For can cause unconsciousness or even D To allow proper operation of your
scheduled maintenance information, death. vehicle’s ventilation system, keep
refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance D Make sure the exhaust system has the inlet grilles in front of the wind-
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple- no holes or loose connections. The shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-
ment”. er obstructions.
system should be checked from
time to time. If you hit something, D If you smell exhaust fumes in the
or notice a change in the sound of vehicle, drive with the windows
the exhaust, have the system open and the back door closed.
checked immediately. Have the cause immediately located
D Do not run the engine in a garage and corrected.
or enclosed area except for the
time needed to drive the vehicle in
or out. The exhaust gases cannot
escape, making this a particularly
dangerous situation.
D Do not remain for a long time in a
parked vehicle with the engine run-
ning. If it is unavoidable, however,
do so only in an unconfined area
and adjust the heating or cooling
system to force outside air into the
vehicle.

229
Facts about engine oil
consumption
FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL D Oil is also used to lubricate the stems As an example, if a vehicle is used for
Engine oil has the primary functions of of the intake valves. Some of this oil repeated short trips, and consumes a nor-
lubricating and cooling the inside of the is sucked into the combustion chamber mal amount of oil, the dipstick may not
engine, and plays a major role in main- together with the intake air and is show any drop in the oil level at all, even
taining the engine in proper working order. burned along with the fuel. High tem- after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This
perature exhaust gases also burn the is because the oil is gradually becoming
ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve diluted with fuel or moisture, making it
It is normal that an engine should con- stems. appear that the oil level has not changed.
sume some engine oil during normal The amount of engine oil consumed de- The diluting ingredients evaporate out
engine operation. The causes of oil pends on the viscosity of the oil, the when the vehicle is then driven at high
consumption in a normal engine are as quality of the oil and the conditions the speeds, as on an expressway, making it
follows. vehicle is driven under. appear that oil is excessively consumed
D Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston More oil is consumed by high- speed driv- after driving at high speeds.
rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil ing and frequent acceleration and decel- IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL
is left on the cylinder wall when a pis- eration. CHECK
ton moves downwards in the cylinder.
High negative pressure generated when A new engine consumes more oil, since One of the most important points in prop-
the vehicle is decelerating sucks some its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-
of this oil into the combustion chamber. have not become conditioned. gine oil at the optimum level so that oil
This oil as well as some part of the oil Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000 function will not be impaired. Therefore, it
film left on the cylinder wall is burned km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp.qt/600 is essential that the oil level be checked
by the high temperature combustion miles) regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil
gases during the combustion process. level be checked every time you refuel
When judging the amount of oil con- the vehicle.
sumption, note that the oil may become
diluted and make it difficult to judge NOTICE
the true level accurately.
Failure to check the oil level regularly
could lead to serious engine trouble
due to insufficient oil.

230
 Iridium- tipped spark plugs Brake system
For detailed information on oil level check, BRAKE SYSTEM
see “Checking the engine oil level” on This brake system has two independent
page 314. hydraulic circuits. If either circuit should
fail, the other will still work. However, the
pedal will be harder to press, and your
stopping distance will increase. Also, the
brake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only a

single brake system. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.

Your engine is fitted with iridium- tipped

spark plugs. BRAKE BOOSTER
The brake booster uses brake fluid pres-
NOTICE surized by the pump to power- assist the
brakes. If the brake booster fails during
Use only iridium- tipped spark plugs
driving, the brake system warning light
and do not adjust gaps for your en-
comes on and buzzer sound continuously.
gine performance and smooth drivabil-
In this case, the brakes may not work
ity.
properly. If they do not work well, depress
the brake pedal firmly. If the brake system
warning light comes on, immediately stop
your vehicle and contact your Toyota deal-
er.

231
The brake system warning light may stay ANTI- LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM Depressing the brake pedal on slippery
on for about 60 seconds after the ignition (with “ABS” warning light) road surfaces such as on a manhole cov-
key is turned to “ON” position. It is nor- The anti- lock brake system is designed er, a steel plate at a construction site,
mal if the light turns off after a while. to automatically help prevent lock- up of joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly the wheels during a sudden braking or tends to activate the anti- lock brake sys-
may turn on the brake system warning braking on slippery road surfaces. This tem.
light and buzzer. It is normal if the light assists in providing stability and steer- You may hear a click or motor sound in
turns off and the buzzer stops sounding ing performance of the vehicle under the engine compartment for a few seconds
after a few seconds. these circumstances. when the engine is started or just after
You may hear a small sound in the engine the vehicle begins to move. This means
compartment after the engine is started or Effective way to press the ABS brake that the anti- lock brake system is in the
the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly. pedal: When the anti- lock brake system self check mode, and does not indicate a
This is a pump pulsating sound of the function is in action, you may feel the malfunction.
brake system, and it is not a malfunction. brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise. When the anti- lock brake system is ac-
In this situation, to let the anti- lock tivated, the following conditions may
CAUTION brake system work for you, just hold the occur. They do not indicate a malfunc-
brake pedal down more firmly. Do not tion of the system:
D Do not pump the brake pedal if the pump the brake in a panic stop. This
D You may hear the anti- lock brake sys-
engine stalls. Each push on the will result in reduced braking perfor-
tem operating and feel the brake pedal
pedal uses up your brake fluid mance.
pulsating and the vibrations of the body
pressure reserve. and steering wheel. You may also hear
The anti- lock brake system becomes op-
D Even if the power assist is com- erative after the vehicle has accelerated the motor sound in the engine compart-
pletely lost, the brakes will still to a speed in excess of approximately 10 ment even after the vehicle is stopped.
work. But you will have to push the km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the D At the end of the anti- lock brake sys-
pedal hard, much harder than nor- vehicle decelerates to a speed below tem activation, the brake pedal may
mal. And your braking distance will approximately 5 km/h (3 mph). move a little forward.
increase.

232
 CAUTION Anti- lock brake system is not de-
signed to shorten the stopping dis-
Do not overestimate the anti- lock tance: Always drive at a moderate
brake system: Although the anti- lock speed and maintain a safe distance
brake system assists in providing ve- from the vehicle in front of you.
hicle control, it is still important to Compared with vehicles without an
drive with all due care and maintain anti- lock brake system, your vehicle
a moderate speed and safe distance may require a longer stopping dis-
from the vehicle in front of you, be- tance in the following cases:
cause there are limits to the vehicle D Driving on rough, gravel or snow-
stability and effectiveness of steering covered roads.
wheel operation even with the anti-
lock brake system on. D Driving with tire chains installed.
If tire grip performance exceeds its D Driving over the steps such as the “ABS” warning light
capability, or if hydroplaning occurs joints on the road.
The light comes on when the ignition
during high speed driving in the rain, D Driving on roads where the road key is turned to the “ON” position. If
the anti- lock brake system does not surface is pitted or has other differ- the anti- lock brake system and the
provide vehicle control. ences in surface height. brake assist system work properly, the
Install all 4 tires of specified size at light turns off after a few seconds.
appropriate pressure: The anti- lock Thereafter, if either of the systems mal-
brake system detects vehicle speeds functions, the light comes on.
using the speed sensors for respec-
tive wheels’ turning speeds. The use
of tires other than specified may fail
to detect the accurate turning speed,
resulting in a longer stopping dis-
tance.

233
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and DRUM- IN- DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKE
the brake system warning light is off), the CAUTION SYSTEM
anti- lock brake system, the brake assist Your vehicle has a drum- in- disc type
system, the vehicle stability control sys- If the “ABS” warning light remains on
parking brake system. This type of brake
tem and/or active traction control system together with the brake system warn-
system needs bedding- down of the brake
do/does not operate, but the brake system ing light, immediately stop your ve-
shoes periodically or whenever the parking
still operates conventionally. hicle at a safe place and contact your
brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.
Toyota dealer.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed-
the brake system warning light is off), the In this case, not only the anti- lock
brake system will fail but also the ding- down.
anti- lock brake system does not operate
so that the wheels could lock up during vehicle will become extremely unsta- BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM
a sudden braking or braking on slippery ble during braking. When you slam the brakes on, the
road surfaces. brake assist system judges as an emer-
If either of the following conditions oc- Either of the following conditions may gency stop and provides more powerful
curs, this indicates a malfunction some- occur, but do not indicate a malfunc- braking for a driver who cannot hold
where in the components monitored by tion. down the brake pedal firmly.
the warning light system. Contact your D The light may stay on for about 60 When you slam the brakes on, more pow-
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to seconds after the ignition key is turned erful braking will be applied. At this time,
service the vehicle. to “ON” position. It is normal if it turns you may hear a sound in the engine
D The light does not come on when the off after a while. compartment and feel the vibrations of the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi- brake pedal. This does not indicate a mal-
D Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
tion, or remains on. function.
may turn on the light. It is normal if it
D The light comes on while you are driv- turns off after a few seconds. The brake assist system becomes opera-
ing. tive after the vehicle has accelerated to
a speed in excess of approximately 10
A warning light turning on briefly during km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
operation does not indicate a problem. vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

234
 Brake pad wear limit indicators Rear step bumper
The brake assist system may not work for
about 60 seconds after the engine is
started.
For an explanation of this system’s warn-
ing light, see “Service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers” on page 124.

The brake pad wear limit indicators on The rear step bumper is for rear end
your disc brakes give a warning noise protection and easier step- up loading.
when the brake pads are worn to where To get on the rear step bumper, use the
replacement is required. shaded area between the arrows in the
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise illustration.
while driving, have the brake pads
checked and replaced by your Toyota CAUTION
dealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-
tor damage can result if the pads are not D Do not allow more than one person
replaced when necessary. to get on the rear step bumper at
a time. It is designed for only one
person.
D Never drive the vehicle with anyone
on the rear step bumper.

235
 Your Toyota’s identification—
—Vehicle identification
Limited- slip differential number
Some Toyotas are equipped with a lim-
ited- slip differential. If one of the rear
wheels begins to spin, the limited- slip dif-
ferential is designed to aid traction by
automatically transmitting driving force to
the other rear wheel. If you are not sure
whether your vehicle is equipped with one, 20c508a
you can ask your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Do not start or run the engine while

your vehicle is supported by a jack.
The vehicle could be driven off the
jack and could pose a danger or re- The vehicle identification number (VIN) The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
sult in serious injury. is the legal identifier for your vehicle. also on the Certification Label.
This number is on the left top of the
instrument panel, and can be seen
NOTICE through the windshield from outside.
Use only a spare tire of the same This is the primary identification number
size, construction and load capacity for your Toyota. It is used in registering
as the original tires on your Toyota the ownership of your vehicle.
because damage to the limited- slip
differential could possibly occur with
another tire type.

236
—Engine number Theft prevention labels Suspension and chassis
Your new vehicle carries theft preven-
tion labels which are approximately 56 CAUTION
mm (2.20 in.) by 16 mm (0.63 in.).
Do not modify the suspension/chassis
The purpose of these labels is to reduce
with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It
the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-
can cause dangerous handling charac-
ing the tracing and recovery of parts from
teristics, resulting in loss of control.
stolen vehicles. The label is designed so
that once it is applied to a surface, any
attempt to remove it will result in destroy-
ing the integrity of the label. Transferring
these labels intact from one part to anoth-
er, will be impossible.

NOTICE
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown. You should not attempt to remove the
theft prevention labels as it may vio-
late certain state or federal laws.

237
Tire information—
—Tire symbols
This illustration indicates typical tire
symbols.
1. Tire size—For details, see “Tire
size” on page 240.
2. DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)—For details, see
“DOT and Tire Identification Num-
ber (TIN)” on page 239.
3. Tire ply composition and materi-
als—Plies mean a layer of rubber-
coated parallel cords. Cords mean
the strands forming the plies in the
20c505a tire.
4. Location of tread wear indica-
tors—For details, see “Checking
and replacing tires” on page 323.
5. Summer tire or all season tire—
An all season tire has “M+S” on
the sidewall. The tire not marked
with “M+S” is a summer tire. For
details, see “Types of tires” on
page 250.
6. Radial tires or bias- ply tires—A
radial tire has “RADIAL” on the
sidewall. A tire not marked with
“RADIAL” is a bias- ply tire.

238
 —DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)
7. “TUBELESS” or “TUBE TYPE” The “DOT” symbol certifies that the
—A tubeless tire does not have a tire conforms to applicable Federal
tube inside the tire and air is direct- Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
ly filled in the tire. A tube type tire
has a tube inside the tire and the
tube maintains the air pressure.
8. Uniform tire quality grad- 21A009a
ing—For details, see “Uniform tire
quality grading” that follows.
9. Load limit at maximum cold tire
inflation pressure—For details,
see “Checking and replacing tires”
on page 323. This illustration indicates typical DOT
10. Maximum cold tire inflation and Tire Identification Number (TIN).
pressure—This means the pres- 1. “DOT” symbol
sure to which a tire may be in-
flated. For recommended cold tire 2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)
inflation pressure, see “Tires” on 3. Tire manufacturer’s identification
page 344. mark
4. Tire size code
5. Manufacturer’s optional tire type
code (3 or 4 letters)
6. Manufacturing week
7. Manufacturing year

239
—Tire size —Name of each section of tire

20c506a 21A007a 21A006a

This illustration indicates typical tire 1. Section width 1. Bead

size. 2. Tire height 2. Sidewall
1. Tire use (P=Passenger car, 3. Wheel diameter 3. Shoulder
T=Temporary use)
4. Tread
2. Section width (in millimeters)
5. Belt
3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section
width) 6. Inner liner
4. Tire construction code (R=Radial, 7. Reinforcing rubber
D=Diagonal) 8. Carcass
5. Wheel diameter (in inch) 9. Rim lines
6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits) 10. Bead wires
7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one 11. Chafer
letter)

240
—Uniform tire quality grading
This information has been prepared Tread wear—The tread wear grade Traction AA, A, B, C—The traction
in accordance with regulations issued is a comparative rating based on the grades, from highest to lowest, are
by the National Highway Traffic Safe- wear rate of the tire when tested un- AA, A, B, and C, and they represent
ty Administration of the U.S. Depart- der controlled conditions on a speci- the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-
ment of Transportation. It provides fied government test course. For ex- ment as measured under controlled
the purchasers and/or prospective ample, a tire graded 150 would wear conditions on specified government
purchasers of Toyota vehicles with in- one and a half (1- 1/2) times as well test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
formation on uniform tire quality grad- on the government course as a tire A tire marked C may have poor trac-
ing. graded 100. The relative performance tion performance.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer of tires depends upon the actual Warning: The traction grade assigned
any questions you may have as you conditions of their use, however, and to this tire is based on braking
read this information. may depart significantly from the (straight ahead) traction tests and
norm due to variations in driving hab- does not include cornering (turning)
DOT quality grades—All passenger its, service practices and differences
vehicle tires must conform to Fed- traction.
in road characteristics and climate.
eral Safety Requirements in addi-
tion to these grades. Quality
grades can be found where appli-
cable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum sec-
tion width. For example: Treadwear
200 Traction AA Temperature A.

241
Temperature A, B, C—The tempera-
ture grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resis-
tance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-
responds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of per-
formance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for
this tire are established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not over-
loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either sep-
arately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.

242
—Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Meaning
tire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours
Cold tire inflation pressure or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile under that
condition
the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it is
Maximum inflation pressure
shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced)
of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, pow-
Accessory weight
er seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as
factory- installed equipment (whether installed or not)
the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum
Curb weight capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and addi-
tional weight optional engine
the sum of—
(a) curb weight
weight;
Maximum loaded vehicle weight (b) accessory weight;
weight
((c)) vehicle capacityy weight;
g and
(d) production
d ti options
ti weight
i ht
68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second column
Normal occupant weight
of Table 1 that follows

243
 Tire related term Meaning
the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over
2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not pre-
Production options weight
viously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim
Vehicle capacity weight the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s desig-
(Total load capacity) nated seating capacity
(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper
Intended outboard sidewall than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire,
tire or
(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular
side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle
distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table
Occupant distribution
1 that follows
a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads
Rim
are seated
Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation rim diameter and width
Rim type designation the industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code
Rim width nominal distance between rim flanges
the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two

244
 Tire related term Meaning
the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle
Vehicle normal load on the tire its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight
(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two
Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Table 1– Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating capacity, number Vehicle normal load, number of occu- Occupant distribution in a normally
of occupants pants loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat

245
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load
NOTICE CAUTION
capacity, seating capacity, towing ca-
pacity and cargo capacity. Follow the Even if the number of occupants
load limits shown below. Total load ca- are within the seating capacity, Do not apply the load more than
pacity and seating capacity are also each load limit. That may cause
do not exceed the total load ca-
described on the tire and loading in- not only damage to the tires, but
pacity.
formation label. For location of the tire also deterioration to the steering
and loading information label, see ability and braking ability, which
Towing capacity: may cause an accident.
“Checking tire information pressure” 2948 kg (6500 lb.)
on page 320. Towing capacity means the maximum
Total load capacity: gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus
545 kg (1200 lb.) its cargo weight) that your vehicle is
Total load capacity means combined able to tow.
weight of occupants, cargo and lug- Cargo capacity
gage. Tongue load is included when
trailer towing. Cargo capacity may increase or de-
crease depending on the size (weight)
Seating capacity: and the number of occupants. For de-
Total 8 (Front 2, Rear 6) tails, see “Capacity and distribution”
Seating capacity means the maximum that follows.
number of occupants whose esti-
mated average weight is 68 kg (150
lb.) per person. Depending on the
weight of each person, the seating ca-
pacity given may exceed the total
load capacity.

246
Cargo and luggage—
—Stowage precautions
When stowing cargo and luggage in
D Never allow anyone to ride in NOTICE
or on the vehicle, observe the follow-
ing: the luggage compartment. It is
Do not load the vehicle beyond
not designed for passengers.
D Put cargo and luggage in the lug- the vehicle capacity weight giv-
They should ride in their seats
gage compartment when at all with their seat belts properly en in Section 8.
possible. Be sure all items are se- fastened. Otherwise, they are
cured in place. much more likely to suffer seri-
D Be careful to keep the vehicle bal- ous bodily injury, in the event
anced. Locating the weight as far of sudden braking or a colli-
forward as possible helps maintain sion.
the balance. D Do not place anything on the
D For better fuel economy, do not luggage cover. Such items may
carry unneeded weight. be thrown about and possibly
injure people in the vehicle
CAUTION during sudden braking or an
accident. Secure all items in a
D To prevent cargo and luggage safe place.
from sliding forward during D Do not drive with objects left
braking, do not stack anything on top of the instrument panel.
in the luggage compartment They may interfere with the
higher than the seatbacks. driver’s field of view. Or they
D Do not place anything on the may move during sharp vehicle
flattened seat or it may slide acceleration or turning, and im-
forward during braking. pair the driver’s control of the
vehicle. In an accident they
may injure the vehicle occu-
pants.

247
—Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the to- 4. The resulting figure equals the
tal weight of the occupants. available amount of cargo and lug-
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac- gage load capacity. For example,
ity) – (Total weight of occupants) if the “XXX” amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
STEPS FOR DETERMINING COR- passengers in your vehicle, the
RECT LOAD LIMIT amount of available cargo and lug- Cargo
1. Locate the statement “The com- gage load capacity is 650 lbs. capacity
bined weight of occupants and car- (1400–750 (5x150)=650 lbs).
go should never exceed XXX 5. Determine the combined weight of
pounds” on your vehicle’s placard. Total load
luggage and cargo being loaded on capacity
2. Determine the combined weight of the vehicle. That weight may not
the driver and passengers that will safely exceed the available cargo
be riding in your vehicle. and luggage load capacity calcu- EXAMPLE ON YOUR VEHICLE
3. Subtract the combined weight of lated in Step 4. In case that 2 people with the com-
the driver and passengers from 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail- bined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) are
XXX kilograms or XXX pounds. er, load from your trailer will be riding in your vehicle with the total
transferred to your vehicle. Consult load capacity of 545 kg (1200 lb.), the
this manual to determine how this available amount of cargo and lug-
reduces the available cargo and gage load capacity will be as follows:
luggage load capacity of your ve- 545 kg – 166 kg = 379kg.
hicle. (1200 lb. – 366 lb. = 834 lb.)
For details about trailer towing, see From this condition, if 3 more passen-
page 257. gers with the combined weight of 176
kg (388 lb.) get on, the available car-
go and luggage load will be reduced
as follows:

248
379 kg – 176 kg = 203 kg.
(834 lb. – 388 lb. = 446 lb.) CAUTION
Weight of removed
As shown in the above example, if the Even if the total load of occu- third seat
number of occupants increases, the pant’s weight and the cargo load
cargo and luggage load equaling the is less than the total load capac- Cargo
combined weight of occupants who ity, do not apply the load uneven- capacity
got on later must be reduced. In other ly. That may cause not only dam-
words, if the increase in the number age to the tire but also deteriora-
of occupants causes the excess of tion to the steering ability due to
the total load capacity (combined unbalance of the vehicle, causing
weight of occupants plus cargo and an accident.
luggage load), you have to reduce the
cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
SEATING CONFIGURATION VARI-
For details about total load capacity, ATION
see “Vehicle load limits” on page 246.
In case of removing the third seat, it
is possible to load as much cargo as
the weight of the removed seat.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-
ity) – (Total weight of occupants) +
(weight of the removed third seat)
Third seat weight, kg (lb.):
Right 20 (44)
Left 20 (44)

249
Types of tires
Determine what kind of tires your All season tires, however, do not have
vehicle is originally equipped with. adequate traction performance
1. Summer tires compared with snow tires in heavy or
loose snow. Also, all season tires fall
Summer tires are high- speed capabil- short in acceleration and handling
ity tires best suited to highway driving performance compared with summer
under dry conditions. tires in highway driving.
Since summer tires do not have the The details about how to distinguish
same traction performance as snow summer tires from all season tires are
tires, summer tires are inadequate for described on page 238.
driving on snow- covered or icy roads.
For driving on snow- covered or icy CAUTION
roads, we recommend using snow
tires. If installing snow tires, be sure D Do not mix summer and all sea-
to replace all four tires. son tires on your vehicle as
2. All season tires this can cause dangerous han-
All season tires are designed to pro- dling characteristics, resulting
vide better traction in snow and to be in loss of control.
adequate for driving in most winter D Do not use tires other than the
conditions, as well as for use all year manufacturer’s designated
round. tires, and do not mix tires or
wheels of the sizes different
from the originally equipped
tires and wheels as this could
result in loss of control and
could cause death or serious
injury.

250
 SECTION 3
STARTING AND DRIVING
Before starting the enginee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Tips for driving in various conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Off- road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer, too . . . . . . . . . 266

251
 How to start the engine—
Before starting the engine (a) Cranking hold function (b) Before cranking
1. Check the area around the vehicle be- Once you turn the ignition key to “START” 1. Apply the parking brake firmly.
fore entering it. position and release it, the cranking hold 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-
2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle, function continues to crank the engine in sories.
head restraint height and steering “ON” position until it starts.
3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If you
wheel angle. The function stops cranking the engine need to restart the engine while the
3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view after about 25 seconds maximum if the vehicle is moving, put the selector le-
mirrors. engine has not started yet. When you ver in “N”. A starter safety device will
crank the engine again, wait a few sec- prevent the starter from operating if the
4. Lock all doors. onds and restart it. selector lever is in any drive position.
5. Fasten seat belts. If you hold the key in “START” position, 4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it
the function will keep cranking for about to the floor until driving off.
30 seconds maximum.

252
 Tips for driving in various
(c) Starting the engine conditions
Before starting the engine, be sure to fol- D Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.
NOTICE
low the instructions in “(b) Before crank- This will allow you much better control.
ing”. z Do not race a cold engine. D Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-
Normal starting procedure z If the engine becomes difficult to sible, at a right angle. Avoid driving
The multiport fuel injection system/sequen- start or stalls frequently, have the onto high, sharp- edged objects and
tial multiport fuel injection system in your engine checked immediately. other road hazards. Failure to do so
engine automatically controls the proper can lead to severe tire damage such
air- fuel mixture for starting. as a tire burst.
Drive slowly when passing over bumps
You can start a cold or hot engine as or travelling on a bumpy road. Other-
follows: wise, the impact could cause severe
With your foot off the accelerator pedal, damage to the tires and/or wheels.
turning the ignition key to “START” posi-
tion, then release it. D When parking on a hill, turn the front
wheels until they touch the curb so
Engine should be warmed up by driving, that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the
not in idle. For warming up, drive with parking brake, and place the transmis-
smoothly turning engine until engine cool- sion in “P”. If necessary, block the
ant temperature is within normal range. wheels.
If the engine stalls... D Washing your vehicle or driving through
Simply restart it, using the correct proce- deep water may get the brakes wet. To
dure given in normal starting. see whether they are wet, check that
If the engine will not start... there is no traffic near you, and then
press the pedal lightly. If you do not
See “If your vehicle will not start” on page feel a normal braking force, the brakes
270. are probably wet. To dry them, drive
the vehicle cautiously while lightly
pressing the brake pedal with the park-
ing brake applied. If they still do not
work safely, pull to the side of the road
and call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

253
 Off- road driving precautions
When driving your vehicle off- road, please
CAUTION D Do not drive in excess of the speed observe the following precautions to en-
limit. Even if the legal speed limit sure your driving enjoyment and to help
D Before driving off, make sure the permits it, do not drive over 140 prevent the closure of areas to off- road
parking brake is fully released and km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle vehicles.
that the parking brake reminder has high- speed capability tires.
a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where
light is off. Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may
off- road vehicles are permitted to trav-
D Do not leave your vehicle unat- result in tire failure, loss of control
el.
tended while the engine is running. and possible injury. Be sure to con-
sult a tire dealer to determine b. Respect private property. Get owner’s
D Do not rest your foot on the brake whether the tires on your vehicle permission before entering private prop-
pedal while driving. It can cause are high- speed capability tires or erty.
dangerous overheating, needless not before driving at such speeds. c. Do not enter areas that are closed.
wear, and poor fuel economy.
D Do not continue normal driving Honor gates, barriers and signs that re-
D To drive down a long or steep hill, when the brakes are wet. If they are strict travel.
reduce your speed and downshift. wet, your vehicle will require a d. Stay on established roads. When
Remember, if you ride the brakes longer stopping distance, and it conditions are wet, driving techniques
excessively, they may overheat and may pull to one side when the should be changed or travel delayed to
not work properly. brakes are applied. Also, the park- prevent damage to roads.
D Be careful when accelerating, up- ing brake will not hold the vehicle
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and
shifting, downshifting or braking on securely.
Puerto Rico:
a slippery surface. Sudden accelera-
tion or engine braking could cause To obtain additional information pertaining
the vehicle to spin or skid. to driving your vehicle off- road, consult
the following organizations.
D State and Local Parks and Recreation
Departments
D State Motor Vehicle Bureau
D Recreational Vehicle Clubs

254
D U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of
Land Management D After driving through tall grass, NOTICE
mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check
z If driving through water, such as
CAUTION that there is no grass, bush, paper,
when crossing shallow streams,
rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or
first check the depth of the water
Always observe the following precau- trapped on the underbody. Clear
and the bottom of the river bed for
tions to help minimize the risk of se- off any such matter from the under-
firmness. Drive slowly and avoid
rious personal injury or damage to body. If the vehicle is used with
deep water.
your vehicle: these materials trapped or adhering
to the underbody, a breakdown or z Take all necessary safety measures
D Drive carefully when off the road. fire could occur. to ensure that water damage to the
Do not take unnecessary risks by engine or other components does
driving in dangerous places. D In a rollover crash, an unbelted per- not occur.
son is significantly more likely to
D Do not grip the steering wheel die than a person wearing a seat z Water entering the engine air intake
spokes when driving off- road. A belt. Therefore, the driver and all will cause severe engine damage.
bad bump could jerk the wheel and passengers should fasten their seat z Water entering the automatic trans-
injure your hands. Keep both belts whenever the vehicle is mov- mission will cause deterioration in
hands and especially your thumbs ing. shift quality, locking up of your
on the outside of the rim.
D When driving off- road or in rugged transmission accompanied by ribra-
D Always check your brakes for effec- terrain, do not drive at excessive tion, and ultimately damage.
tiveness immediately after driving in speeds, jump, make sharp turns, z Water can wash the grease from
sand, mud, water or snow. strike objects, etc. This may cause wheel bearings, causing rusting and
loss of control or vehicle rollover premature failure, and may also en-
causing death or serious injury. ter the differentials, transmission
You are also risking expensive dam- and transfer case, reducing the gear
age to your vehicle’s suspension oil’s lubricating qualities.
and chassis.

255
 Winter driving tips
Make sure your coolant is properly pro- Check the condition of the battery and
z Sand and mud that has accumulated tected against freezing. cables.
in brake drums and around brake
discs may affect braking efficiency Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of
and may damage brake system com- or similar high quality ethylene glycol any battery, so it must be in top shape
ponents. based non- silicate, non- amine, non- nitrite, to provide enough power for winter start-
and non- borate coolant with long- life ing. It tells you how to visually inspect the
z Always perform a maintenance in- hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant battery on page 330. Your Toyota dealer
spection after each day of off- road with long- life hybrid organic acid and most service stations will be pleased
driving that has taken you through technology is a combination of low to check the level of charge.
rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. phosphates and organic acids.)
For scheduled maintenance informa- Make sure the engine oil viscosity is
tion, refer to the “Scheduled Main- See “Checking the engine coolant level” suitable for the cold weather.
tenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual on page 316 for details of coolant type See page 315 for recommended viscosity.
Supplement”. selection. Leaving a heavy summer oil in your ve-
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mix- hicle during winter months may cause
ture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized harder starting. If you are not sure about
water. This coolant provides protection which oil to use, call your Toyota dealer–
down to about –35°C (–31°F). they will be pleased to help.
Keep the door locks from freezing.
NOTICE
Squirt lock de- icer or glycerine into the
Do not use plain water alone. locks to keep them from freezing.
Use a washer fluid containing an anti-
freeze solution.
This product is available at your Toyota
dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow
the manufacturer’s directions for how
much to mix with water.

256
 Dinghy towing Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a
NOTICE
passenger- and- load- carrying vehicle. Tow-
Do not use engine antifreeze or any ing a trailer will have an adverse effect on
other substitute because it may dam- handling, performance, braking, durability
age your vehicle’s paint. and driving economy (fuel consumption,
etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend
30c001a on the proper use of correct equipment
Do not use your parking brake when
and cautious driving habits. For your safe-
there is a possibility it could freeze.
ty and the safety of others, you must not
When parking, put the transmission into overload your vehicle or trailer. Ask your
“P” and block the front wheels. Do not local Toyota dealer for further details be-
use the parking brake, or snow or water fore towing.
accumulated in and around the parking
brake mechanism may freeze, making it CAUTION
hard to release. Your vehicle is not designed to be
Keep ice and snow from accumulating dinghy towed (with four wheels on the Vehicles with active height control
under the fenders. ground) behind a motorhome. suspension system: When disconnect-
Ice and snow built up under your fenders ing a trailer, put the vehicle height in
NOTICE the “LO” (Low) mode and push the
can make steering difficult. During bad
winter driving, stop and check under the height control switch to turn off the
Do not tow your vehicle with four
fenders occasionally. active height control suspension.
wheels on the ground. This may
Otherwise, the vehicle height may be
Depending on where you are driving, cause serious damage to your vehicle.
changed in the automatic leveling
we recommend you carry some emer- function, resulting in an accident. For
gency equipment. details, see “Active height control
Some of the things you might put in the suspension” on page 158.
vehicle are tire chains, window scraper,
bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,
jumper cables, etc.

257
WEIGHT LIMITS
CAUTION D Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-
Before towing, make sure the total trail-
ent weight capacities established by
er weight, gross combination weight,
D The maximum gross trailer weight the hitch manufacturer. Even though
gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight the vehicle may be physically capa-
(trailer weight plus cargo weight)
and trailer tongue load are all within
must never exceed 2948 kg ble of towing a higher weight, the
the limits.
(6500 lb.). If towing a trailer and operator must determine the maxi-
The total trailer weight and tongue load cargo weighing over 907 kg mum weight rating of the particular
can be measured with platform scales (2000 lb.), it is necessary to use a hitch assembly and never exceed
found at a highway weighing station, build- sway control device with sufficient the maximum weight rating speci-
ing supply company, trucking company, capacity. The combination of the fied for the trailer- hitch. Exceeding
junk yard, etc. gross trailer weight added to the the maximum weight rating set by
total weight of the vehicle, occu- the trailer hitch manufacturer can
pants and vehicle cargo must never cause an accident resulting in seri-
exceed a total of 5625 kg ous personal injuries.
(12400 lb.). Exceeding the maximum
weight of the trailer, the vehicle, or
the vehicle and trailer combination,
can cause an accident resulting in
serious personal injuries.

258
 D The load on either the front or rear Total trailer weight Tongue load
axle resulting from distribution of
the gross vehicle weight on both
axles must not exceed the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed
on the Certification Label.
20c508

Tongue load
100 = 9 to 11% (∗ 1)
Total trailer weight or 15% (∗ 2)

D The gross vehicle weight must not D The trailer cargo load should be
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight distributed so that the tongue load
Rating (GVWR) indicated on the is 9 to 11% for weight carrying
Certification Label. The gross ve- hitch (∗1) or 15% for weight distrib-
hicle weight is the sum of weights uting hitch (∗2) of the total trailer
of the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas- weight, not exceeding the maximum
sengers, luggage, hitch and trailer load of the following
tongue load. It also includes the Weight carrying hitch
weight of any special equipment 295 kg (650 lb.)
installed on your vehicle. Weight distributing hitch
442 kg (975 lb.)

259
 HITCHES
Never load the trailer with more NOTICE
weight in the back than in the
D If you wish to install a trailer hitch, you
should consult with your Toyota dealer. Do not use axle- mounted hitches as
front. About 60% of the trailer load
D Use only a hitch recommended by the they can cause damage to the axle
should be in the front half of the
hitch manufacturer and the one which housing, wheel bearings, wheels or
trailer and the remaining 40% in the
conforms to the total trailer weight tires. Also, never install a hitch which
rear.
requirement. may interfere with the normal function
of an Energy Absorbing Bumper, if so
D The hitch must be bolted securely to equipped.
the vehicle frame and installed accord-
ing to the hitch manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
D The hitch ball and king pin should have
a light coat of grease.
D Toyota recommends removing the trail-
er hitch whenever you are not towing
a trailer to reduce the possibility of
additional damage caused by the hitch
if your vehicle is struck from behind.
After removing the hitch, seal any
mounting holes in the vehicle body to
prevent entry of pollutants such as ex-
haust fumes, dirt, water, etc.

260
 Trailer Class Typical Trailer Ball Size
III 2 in.
II 2 in.
I 1 7/8 in.
2. Select the appropriate trailer ball to
match or exceed the gross trailer
weight rating of the trailer. The trailer
ball load rating should be printed on
the top of the ball.
3. When mounted in the ball mount, the
threaded ball shank must protrude be-
yond the bottom of the lock washer
and nut at least 2 threads. The trailer
1 Trailer ball load rating ball shank must be matched to the ball
mount hole diameter size.
2 Ball diameter
3 Shank length
4 Shank diameter

TRAILER BALL
Follow these easy steps to properly deter-
mine the correct trailer ball for your ap-
plication:
1. Determine the correct trailer ball size
for the trailer coupler. Most couplers
are stamped with the required trailer
ball size. The sizes you will most likely
find stamped on the coupler are:

1 Coupler
2 Trailer ball

261
MATCHING TRAILER BALL HEIGHT TO TIRES
TRAILER COUPLER HEIGHT CAUTION
D Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are
No matter which class of tow hitch ap- properly inflated. Adjust the tire infla-
D If the total trailer weight exceeds
plies, for a safe trailer hookup, the trailer tion pressure indicated below:
453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes are
ball setup on must be the proper height tire inflation pressure, kPa (psi)
required.
for the coupler on the trailer.
D Never tap into your vehicle’s hy- Front 220 (32)
BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS Rear 240 (35)
draulic system as it would lower its
D Toyota recommends trailers with braking effectiveness. See Section 7- 2 and Section 8 for in-
brakes that conform to any applica- structions.
ble federal and state/provincial regu-
D Never tow a trailer without using a
safety chain securely attached to D The trailer tires should be inflated to
lations.
both the trailer and the vehicle. If the pressure recommended by the trail-
D A safety chain must always be used damage occurs to the coupling unit er manufacturer in respect to the total
between the towing vehicle and the or hitch ball, there is danger of the trailer weight.
trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the trailer wandering over into another
chain for turns. The chain should lane.
cross under the trailer tongue to
prevent the tongue from dropping to
the ground in case it becomes dam-
aged or separated. For correct safety
chain procedures, follow the hitch or
trailer manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions.

262
 BREAK- IN SCHEDULE 3. Turn the ignition switch on or push the
D Toyota recommends that you do not height control switch to turn on the
tow a trailer with a new vehicle or a active height control suspension. Select
vehicle with any new power train com- the “N” (normal) mode with the height
ponent (engine, transmission, differen- select switch.
tial, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first When a vehicle loaded with four occu-
800 km (500 miles) of driving. pants tows a trailer of about 1800 kg
MAINTENANCE (4000 lb.) with more than about 180 kg
(400 lb.) tongue load, the normal mode
D If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will may not be selected with the height con-
require more frequent maintenance due trol indicator “LO”. However, there is no
to the additional load. For this problem to continue normal driving. Drive
information, please refer to the with sufficient care because of large load.
scheduled maintenance information in DISCONNECTING A TRAILER (models
TRAILER LIGHTS the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or with active height control suspension
D Your vehicle is equipped with a wire “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. only)
harness stored in the rear end under D Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and
body. Your vehicle is fitted with a sock- ball and bracket after approximately perform the following:
et for trailer lights under the rear 1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.
bumper. Use either of them to connect 1. Put the active height control suspen-
CONNECTING A TRAILER (models with sion in the “LO” mode. (Make sure the
and operate the trailer lights. However, active height control suspension only)
the trailer lights must comply with fed- vehicle height is in the “LO” mode by
Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and pushing the height select switch on the
eral, state/provincial and local regula-
perform the following: “B”side.)
tions. See your local recreational ve-
hicle dealer or rental agency for the 1. Put the active height control suspen- 2. Turn the ignition switch off or push the
correct type of wiring and relays for sion in the “LO” (low) mode. Turn the height control switch to turn off the
your trailer. Check for correct operation ignition switch off or push the height active height control suspension.
of the turn signals and stop lights each control switch to turn off the active
3. Set the supporting leg of a trailer on
time you hitch up. Direct splicing may height control suspension.
the ground and raise the hitch by 100
damage your vehicle’s electrical system 2. Connect a trailer. mm (4 in.).
and cause a malfunction of your lights.
263
4. Turn the ignition switch on or push the D Check that your rear view mirrors con- D Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera-
height control switch to turn on the form to any applicable federal, state/ tion.
active height control suspension. provincial or local regulations. If not, D Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.
5. Wait for about 20 seconds until the install the rear view mirrors required The trailer could hit your vehicle in a
rear vehicle height is lowered by the for towing purpose. tight turn. Slow down before making a
automatic leveling function. TRAILER TOWING TIPS turn to avoid the necessity of sudden
6. Make sure the hitch is disconnected. If When towing a trailer, your vehicle will braking.
not, raise the hitch higher and repeat handle differently than when not tow- D Remember that when making a turn,
steps 2 through 5. ing. The three main causes of vehicle- the trailer wheels will be closer than
7. Move the vehicle forward in the “LO” trailer accidents are driver error, exces- the vehicle wheels to the inside of the
mode where the hitch does not touch sive speed and improper trailer loading. turn. Therefore, compensate for this by
anything in the “N” mode. Keep these in mind when towing: making a larger than normal turning
D Before starting out, check operation of radius with your vehicle.
8. Put the active height control suspen-
sion in the “N” mode. the lights and all vehicle- trailer connec- D Backing with a trailer is difficult and
tions. After driving a short distance, requires practice. Grip the bottom of
PRE- TOWING SAFETY CHECK stop and recheck the lights and con- the steering wheel and move your hand
D Check that your vehicle remains level nections. Before actually towing a trail- to the left to move the trailer to the
when a loaded or unloaded trailer is er, practice turning, stopping and back- left. Move your hand to the right to
hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has ing with a trailer in an area away from move the trailer to the right. (This pro-
an abnormal nose- up or nose- down traffic until you learn the feel. cedure is generally opposite to that
condition, and check for improper D Because stopping distance may be in- when backing without a trailer). Also,
tongue load, overload, worn suspension creased, vehicle- to- vehicle distance just turn the steering wheel a little at
or other possible causes. should be increased when towing a a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged
D Make sure the trailer cargo is securely trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of turning. Have someone guide you when
loaded so that it cannot shift. speed, allow at least one vehicle and backing to reduce the risk of an acci-
trailer length between you and the ve- dent.
hicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as
you may skid, resulting in jackknifing
and loss of control. This is especially
true on wet or slippery surfaces.

264
D Crosswinds and rough roads will ad- D Because of the added load of the trail- When restarting out after parking on a
versely affect handling of your vehicle er, your vehicle’s engine may overheat slope:
and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention on hot days (at temperatures over 1. With the transmission in “P” posi-
to the rear from time to time to pre- 30°C [85°F]) when going up a long or tion, start the engine. Be sure to
pare yourself for being passed by large steep grade with a trailer. If the engine keep the brake pedal depressed.
trucks or buses, which may cause your coolant temperature gauge indicates
vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying overheating, immediately turn off the air 2. Shift into the “3”, “2”, “L” or “R”
happens, firmly grip the steering wheel conditioning (if in use), pull off the road position.
and reduce speed immediately but and stop in a safe spot. Refer to “If 3. Release the parking brake and
gradually. Never increase speed. Steer your vehicle overheats” on page 274. brake pedal and slowly pull or back
straight ahead. If you make no extreme D Always place wheel blocks under both away from the wheel blocks. Stop
correction with the steering or brakes, the vehicle and trailer wheels when and apply your brakes.
the vehicle and trailer will stabilize it- parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. 4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.
self. Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid park-
D Be careful when passing other ve- ing on a slope with a trailer, but if it
hicles. Passing requires considerable cannot be avoided, do so only after
distance. After passing a vehicle, do performing the following:
not forget the length of your trailer and 1. Apply the brakes and keep them
be sure you have plenty of room be- applied.
fore changing lanes.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks
D In order to maintain engine braking and under both the vehicle and trailer
electrical charging performance, do not wheels.
use the overdrive. Transmission must
be in the “4” position. 3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release your brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the parking brake firmly.
5. Shift into “P” and turn off the en-
gine.

265
 How to save fuel and make
your vehicle last longer, too
Improving fuel economy is easy–just take D Avoid engine over-revving. Use a
CAUTION it easy. It will help make your vehicle last gear position suitable for the road on
longer, too. Here are some specific tips which you are travelling.
D Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or on how to save money on both fuel and
the posted towing speed limit,
D Avoid continuous speeding up and
repairs: slowing down. Stop- and- go driving
whichever is lower. Because insta-
bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle-
D Keep your tires inflated at the cor- wastes fuel.
rect pressure. Underinflation causes D Avoid unnecessary stopping and
trailer combination usually in-
tire wear and wastes fuel. See page on braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try
creases as the speed increases, ex-
320. to time the traffic signals so you only
ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) may
cause loss of control. D Do not carry unneeded weight in need to stop as little as possible or
your vehicle. Excess weight puts a take advantage of through streets to
D Slow down and downshift before
descending steep or long downhill heavier load on the engine, causing avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-
greater fuel consumption. tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-
grades. Do not make sudden down-
D Avoid lengthy warm- up idling. Once den braking. This will also reduce wear
shifts.
the engine is running smoothly, begin on your brakes.
D Avoid holding the brake pedal down
too long or too frequently. This
driving—but gently. Remember, howev- D Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams
er, that on cold winter days this may whenever possible.
could cause the brakes to overheat
take a little longer. D Do not rest your foot on the brake
and result in reduced braking effi-
ciency. D Accelerate slowly and smoothly. pedal. This causes premature wear,
Avoid jackrabbit starts. overheating and poor fuel economy.
D Avoid long engine idling. If you have D Maintain a moderate speed on high-
a long wait and you are not in traffic, ways. The faster you drive, the greater
it is better to turn off the engine and the fuel consumption. By reducing your
start again later. speed, you will cut down on fuel con-
sumption.

266
D Keep the front wheels in proper
alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and CAUTION
slow down on rough roads. Improper
alignment not only causes faster tire Never turn off the engine to coast
wear but also puts an extra load on down hills. Your power steering and
the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel. brake booster will not function with-
out the engine running. Also, the
D Keep the bottom of your vehicle free emission control system operates
from mud, etc. This not only lessens
properly only when the engine is run-
weight but also helps prevent corro-
ning.
sion.
D Keep your vehicle tuned- up and in
top shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp-
er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil
and grease, brakes not adjusted, etc.
all lower engine performance and con-
tribute to poor fuel economy. For longer
life of all parts and lower operating
costs, keep all maintenance work on
schedule, and if you often drive under
severe conditions, see that your vehicle
receives more frequent maintenance.
(For scheduled maintenance informa-
tion, please refer to the “Scheduled
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manu-
al Supplement”.)

267
268
 SECTION 4
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
If your vehicle will not startt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
If you cannot increase engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
If your vehicle becomes stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . . 290
If you lose your keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

269
If your vehicle will not start—
(a) Simple checks
Before making these checks, make sure If the engine is not turning over or is If the engine turns over at its normal
you have followed the correct starting turning over too slowly— speed but will not start—
procedure given in “How to start the 1. Check that the battery terminals are 1. The engine may be flooded because of
engine” on page 252 and that you have tight and clean. repeated cranking. See “(b) Starting a
sufficient fuel. Also check whether the flooded engine” for further instructions.
other keys will start the engine. If they 2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch
work, your key may be broken. Have the on the interior light. 2. If the engine still will not start, it needs
key checked at your Toyota dealer. If 3. If the light is out, dim or goes out adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota
none of your keys work, there may be a when the starter is cranked, the battery dealer or qualified repair shop.
malfunction in the immobilizer system. Call is discharged. You may try jump start-
your Toyota dealer. (See “Keys” on page ing. See “(c) Jump starting” for further
10.) instructions.
If the light is O.K., but the engine still will
not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair
shop.

NOTICE
Do not pull- or push- start the ve-
hicle. It may damage the vehicle or
cause a collision when the engine
starts. Also the three- way catalytic
converter may overheat and become a
fire hazard.

270
(b) Starting a flooded engine (c) Jump starting
If the engine will not start, your engine To avoid serious personal injury and
may be flooded because of repeated damage to your vehicle which might re- D The gas normally produced by a
cranking. sult from battery explosion, acid burns, battery will explode if a flame or
electrical burns, or damaged electronic spark is brought near. Use only
If this happens, turn the ignition key to standardized jumper cables and do
“START” with the accelerator pedal fully components, these instructions must be
followed precisely. not smoke or light a match while
depressed, and hold the key at this posi-
jump starting.
tion for about 30 seconds. Then the If you are unsure about how to follow this
cranking hold function stops cranking au- procedure, we strongly recommend that
tomatically, and you can try starting the you seek the help of a competent me- NOTICE
engine with your foot off the accelerator chanic or towing service.
pedal. The battery used for boosting must
If the engine does not start, wait a few CAUTION be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you
minutes and try again. are sure that the booster battery is
D Batteries contain sulfuric acid correct.
If the engine still will not start, it needs
which is poisonous and corrosive.
adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer Wear protective safety glasses when
or qualified repair shop for assistance. jump starting, and avoid spilling
acid on your skin, clothing, or ve-
hicle.
D If you should accidentally get acid
on yourself or in your eyes, remove
any contaminated clothing and flush
the affected area with water im-
mediately. Then get immediate medi-
cal attention. If possible, continue
to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while en route to the medical
office.

271
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
1. If the booster battery is installed in Discharged battery Jumper cable
another vehicle, make sure the vehicles
are not touching. Turn off all unneces-
sary lights and accessories.
Booster
When boosting, use the battery of battery
matching or higher quality. Any other
battery may be difficult to jump start
with. Positive
terminal
If jump starting is difficult, charge the (“+” mark) Discharged battery
Booster
battery for several times. Jumper Negative battery
Positive terminal terminal (“–” mark)
cable (“+” mark)
2. If required, remove all the vent plugs
from the booster and discharged batter-
ies. Lay a cloth over the open vents 4. Make the cable connections in the or- c. Connect the clamp of the negative
on the batteries. (This helps reduce the der a, b, c, d. (black) jumper cable to the negative
explosion hazard, personal injuries and a. Connect the clamp of the positive (–) terminal on the booster battery.
burns.) (red) jumper cable to the positive d. Connect the clamp at the other end
3. If the engine in the vehicle with the (+) terminal on the discharged bat- of the negative (black) jumper cable
booster battery is not running, start it tery. to a solid, stationary, unpainted, me-
and let it run for a few minutes. During b. Connect the clamp at the other end tallic point of the vehicle with the
jump starting, run the engine at about of the positive (red) jumper cable to discharged battery.
2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal the positive (+) terminal on the The recommended connecting point is
lightly depressed. booster battery. shown in the following illustration:

272
 5. Charge the discharged battery with the If the first start attempt is not success-
jumper cables connected for approxi- ful...
mately 5 minutes. At this time, run the Check that the clamp on the jumper
engine in the vehicle with the booster cables are tight. Recharge the discharged
battery at about 2000 rpm with the ac- battery with the jumper cables connected
celerator pedal lightly depressed. for several minutes and restart your en-
6. Start your engine in the normal way. gine in the normal way.
After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm If the another attempt is not successful,
for several minutes with the accelerator the battery may be depleted. Have it
pedal lightly depressed. checked at your Toyota dealer.
7. Carefully disconnect the cables in the
exact reverse order: the negative cable
and then the positive cable.
Connecting point
8. Carefully dispose of the battery cover
Do not connect the cable to or near any cloths—they may now contain sulfuric
part that moves when the engine is acid.
cranked.
9. If removed, replace all the battery vent
plugs.
CAUTION
If the cause of your battery discharging is
When making the connections, to not apparent (for example, lights left on),
avoid serious injury, do not lean over you should have it checked at your Toyota
the battery or accidentally let the dealer.
jumper cables or clamps touch any-
thing except the correct battery termi-
nals or the ground.

273
If your engine stalls while If you cannot increase engine
driving speed If your vehicle overheats
If your engine stalls while driving... If engine speed does not increase when If your engine coolant temperature
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping the accelerator pedal is depressed, the gauge indicates overheating, if you ex-
a straight line. Move cautiously off the electronic throttle control system may perience a loss of power, or if you hear
road to a safe place. be faulty. Move the vehicle to a safe a loud knocking or pinging noise, the
place by means of creeping and call a engine has probably overheated. You
2. Turn on your emergency flashers. Toyota dealer for assistance: should follow this procedure...
3. Try starting the engine again. 1. Depress the brake pedal and shift to 1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-
If the engine will not start, see “If your the “D” position. hicle and turn on your emergency
vehicle will not start” on page 270. 2. Gradually release the brake pedal, and flashers. Put the transmission in “P”
the vehicle starts to move by creeping. and apply the parking brake. Turn off
CAUTION After arriving at a safe place, stop the the air conditioning if it is being used.
vehicle and call a Toyota dealer for 2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the
If the engine is not running, the pow- assistance. radiator or reservoir, stop the engine.
er assist for the brakes and steering Wait until the steam subsides before
will not work so steering and braking CAUTION opening the hood. If there is no coolant
will be much harder than usual. boiling over or steam, leave the engine
D The above method of moving the running.
vehicle is for emergency. Use it
only for moving minimum distances CAUTION
to a safe place.
D Be especially careful to prevent er- To help avoid personal injury, keep
roneous pedal operation. the hood closed until there is no
steam. Escaping steam or coolant is
a sign of very high pressure.

274
 If you have a flat tire—
3. Visually check to see if the engine 1. Reduce your speed gradually,
drive belt (fan belt) is broken or loose. CAUTION keeping a straight line. Move cau-
Look for obvious coolant leaks from the tiously off the road to a safe place
radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle. Do not attempt to remove the radiator
cap when the engine and radiator are
well away from the traffic. Avoid
However, note that water draining from
hot. Serious injury could result from stopping on the center divider of
the air conditioning is normal if it has
scalding hot fluid and steam blown a highway. Park on a level spot
been used.
out under pressure. with firm ground.
CAUTION 2. Stop the engine and turn on your
7. After the engine coolant temperature emergency flashers.
When the engine is running, keep has cooled to normal, again check the 3. Firmly set the parking brake and
hands and clothing away from the coolant level in the reservoir. If neces-
put the transmission in “P”.
moving fan and engine drive belts. sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri-
ous coolant loss indicates a leak in the 4. Have everyone get out of the ve-
4. If the engine drive belt is broken or the system. You should have it checked as hicle on the side away from traffic.
coolant is leaking, stop the engine im- soon as possible at your Toyota dealer. 5. Read the following instructions
mediately. Call a Toyota dealer for as- thoroughly.
sistance.
5. If the engine drive belt is O.K. and
there are no obvious leaks, you may
help the engine cool down more quickly
by running it at about 1500 rpm for a
few minutes with the accelerator pedal
lightly depressed.
6. Check the coolant reservoir. If it is dry,
add coolant to the reservoir while the
engine is running. Fill it about half full.
For the coolant type, see “Coolant type
selection” on page 317.

275
 CAUTION D Make sure to set the jack prop- NOTICE
erly in the jack point. Raising
z Do not continue driving with
When jacking, be sure to observe the vehicle with jack improper-
the following to reduce the possi-
a deflated tire. Driving even a
ly positioned will damage the
bility of personal injury: vehicle or may allow the ve- short distance can damage a
hicle to fall off the jack and tire and wheel beyond repair.
D Follow jacking instructions.
cause personal injury. z Vehicles with active height
D Do not put any part of your
body under the vehicle sup- D Never get under the vehicle control suspension system:
ported by the jack. Otherwise, when the vehicle is supported When jacking up or installing
personal injury may occur. by the jack alone. the tire chains, be sure to
D Do not start or run the engine D Use the jack only for lifting turn off the active height
while your vehicle is supported your vehicle during wheel control system and stop the
by the jack. changing. engine. Otherwise, the ve-
D Do not raise the vehicle with hicle height may change in
D Stop the vehicle on a level firm
ground, firmly set the parking someone in the vehicle. the automatic leveling func-
brake and put the transmission D When raising the vehicle, do tion, resulting in an accident.
in reverse. Block the wheel di- not place any objects on top
agonally opposite to the one of or underneath the jack.
being changed if necessary. D Raise the vehicle only high
enough to remove and change
the tire.

276
—Required tools and spare
tire

1. Get the required tools and spare Turn the jack joint by hand. To remove the spare tire under the
tire. To remove: Turn the joint in direction luggage compartment:
1 Tool bag 1 until the jack is free. 1. Put a jack handle, jack handle ex-
2 Jack To store: Turn the joint in direction 2 tensions and jack handle end to-
3 Spare tire until the jack is firmly secured to pre- gether as shown in the illustration.
vent it flying forward during a collision 1 Jack handle end
To prepare yourself for an emergency, or sudden braking.
you should familiarize yourself with 2 Jack handle extension
the use of the jack, each of the tools 3 Jack handle
and their storage locations.
CAUTION
When storing the jack, put it in place
and secure to prevent it from flying Make sure they are each securely
forward during a collision or sudden fixed with screws.
braking.

277
When connecting a jack handle exten- 2. Remove the access hole cover on 3. Insert the jack handle end into the
sion with a jack handle end, use a the rear bumper with a flathead lowering screw through the access
jack handle to tighten the bolts on the screwdriver. hole and turn it counterclockwise
joints as shown in the illustration. To protect the paint, place several with pushing it to the front lightly.
When connecting the jack handle with sheets of paper over the paintwork.
extension, tighten the wing bolt on the
joint securely. Make sure the hollow
meets the bolt on every joint when
you tighten the bolts.
NOTICE
Tighten all the joints securely.
Otherwise, the extension may
come off and it may damage
the paint or vehicle body.

278
 —Blocking the wheel

4. After the tire is lowered completely When storing the spare tire, put it in 2. Block the wheel diagonally op-
to the ground, remove the holding place with the outer side of the wheel posite the flat tire to keep the
bracket as shown in the illustration. facing up and hook the holding brack- vehicle from rolling when it is
et as shown in the illustration. Then jacked up.
secure the tire, taking care that the When blocking the wheel, place a
tire goes straight up without catching wheel block in front of one of the front
on any other part, to prevent it from wheels or behind one of the rear
moving during a collision or sudden wheels.
braking.
Check the tire from the side to see
that the tire is stored horizontally.

279
—Removing wheel ornament —Loosening wheel nuts

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the

bolts or nuts. The nuts may loos-
en and the wheels may fall off,
which could cause a serious ac-
cident.

3. Remove the wheel ornament. 4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.

Pry off the wheel ornament, using the Always loosen the wheel nuts before
beveled end of the wheel ornament raising the vehicle.
remover as shown. Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise
to loosen. To get maximum leverage,
CAUTION fit the wrench to the nut so that the
handle is on the right side, as shown
Do not try to pull off the orna- above. Grab the wrench near the end
ment by hand. Take due care in of the handle and pull up on the han-
handling the ornament to avoid dle. Be careful that the wrench does
unexpected personal injury. not slip off the nut.
Do not remove the nuts yet—just un-
screw them about one- half turn.

280
—Positioning the jack
JACK POINTS:
Front—Under the frame side rail
Left rear—Under the rear axle
housing
Right rear—Under the bracket on
the rear axle housing
Make sure the jack is positioned on
a level and solid place.

Put a jack handle, jack handle exten-

sions, and jack handle end together
as shown in the illustration.
1 Jack handle end
2 Jack handle extensions
3 Jack handle

CAUTION

Make sure they are each securely

fixed with screws.
5. Position the jack at the correct
jack point as shown.

281
 —Raising your vehicle
NOTICE
Tighten all the joints securely.
Otherwise, the extension may
come off and it may damage
the paint or vehicle body.

When connecting a jack handle exten- 6. After making sure no one is in

sion with another extension and a jack the vehicle, raise it high enough
handle end, use a jack handle to tight- so that the spare tire can be
en the bolts on the joints as shown installed.
in the illustration. When connecting Remember you will need more ground
the jack handle with extension, tight- clearance when putting on the spare
en the wing bolt on the jack handle tire than when removing the flat tire.
securely. Make sure the hollow meets
the bolt on any joint when you tighten
the bolts.

282
 —Changing wheels
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack
handle end into the joint of the jack
(it is a loose fit) and turn it clockwise
with the handle, making sure the han-
dle remains firmly fitted onto the jack
handle extension. As the jack touches
the vehicle and begins to lift, double-
check that it is properly positioned.

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle when

the vehicle is supported by the
jack alone. 7. Remove the wheel nuts and Before putting on wheels, remove any
change tires. corrosion on the mounting surfaces
Lift the flat tire straight off and put it with a wire brush or such. Installation
aside. of wheels without good metal- to- met-
al contact at the mounting surface can
Roll the spare wheel into position and cause wheel nuts to loosen and
align the holes in the wheel with the eventually cause a wheel to come off
bolts. Then lift up the wheel and get while driving.
at least the top bolt started through
its hole. Wiggle the tire and press it
back over the other bolts.

283
—Reinstalling wheel nuts —Lowering your vehicle

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the

bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead
to overtightening the nuts and
damaging the bolts. The nuts
may loosen and the wheels may
fall off, which could cause a seri-
ous accident. If there is oil or
grease on any bolt or nut, clean
it.

8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fin- 9. Lower the vehicle completely
ger tight. and tighten the wheel nuts.
Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end Turn the jack handle extension coun-
inward) and tighten them as much as terclockwise with handle to lower the
you can by hand. Press back on the vehicle, making sure the handle re-
tire and see if you can tighten them mains firmly fitted onto the jack han-
more. dle extension.
Use only the wheel nut wrench and
turn it clockwise to tighten the nuts.
Do not use other tools or any addition-
al leverage other than your hands,
such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.
Make sure the wrench is securely en-
gaged over the nut.

284
 —Reinstalling wheel ornament —After changing wheels
Tighten each nut a little at a time in 11. Check the air pressure of the re-
the order shown. Repeat the process placed tire.
until all the nuts are tight. Adjust the air pressure to the specifi-
cation designated on page 344. If the
CAUTION pressure is lower, drive slowly to the
nearest service station and fill to the
D When lowering the vehicle, correct pressure.
make sure all portions of your
body and all other persons Do not forget to reinstall the tire infla-
around will not be injured as tion valve cap as dirt and moisture
the vehicle is lowered to the could get into the valve core and
ground. possibly cause air leakage. If the cap
is missing, have a new one put on as
D Have the wheel nuts tightened soon as possible.
with a torque wrench to 131 10. Reinstall the wheel ornament.
N·m (13.4 kgf·m, 96.6 ft·lbf), as Put the wheel ornament into position. 12. Restow all the tools, jack and
soon as possible after chang- And press hand firmly on one side of flat tire securely.
ing wheels. Otherwise, the wheel ornament and then firmly tap As soon after changing wheels as
nuts may loosen and the the other side around the edge of possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the
wheels may fall off, which wheel ornament with the heel of your torque specified on page 344 with a
could cause a serious acci- hand to snap into place. torque wrench. Have a technician re-
dent. pair the flat tire.
D Do not attach a heavily dam- CAUTION This is the same procedure for chang-
aged plastic wheel ornament. ing or rotating your tires.
It may fly off the wheel and Take due care in handling the or-
cause accidents while the ve- nament to avoid unexpected per-
hicle is moving. sonal injury.

285
 If your vehicle becomes
stuck
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,
CAUTION NOTICE
mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt to
rock the vehicle free by moving it forward If you rock your vehicle, observe the
Before driving, make sure all the and backward. following precautions to prevent dam-
tools, jack and flat tire are se- If your vehicle is equipped with the trac- age to the transmission and other
curely in place in their storage tion control system, turn off the system to parts.
location to reduce the possibility become unstuck to allow the tires to spin z Do not depress the accelerator ped-
of personal injury during a colli- enough to remove the vehicle from the al while shifting the selector lever
sion or sudden braking. obstruction. (For details, see “Vehicle sta- or before the transmission is com-
bility control system” on page 146.) pletely shifted to forward or reverse
gear.
CAUTION
z Do not race the engine and avoid
spinning the wheels.
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and back- z If your vehicle remains stuck after
ward if people or objects are any- rocking the vehicle several times,
where near the vehicle. During the consider other ways such as tow-
rocking operation the vehicle may ing.
suddenly move forward or backward
as it becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or ob-
jects.

286
If your vehicle needs to be
towed—
If towing is necessary, we recommend
(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck— you have it done by your Toyota dealer CAUTION
—From front or a commercial tow truck service. In
consultation with them, have your ve- Vehicles with active height control
hicle towed using either (a) or (b). suspension system: When your ve-
hicle is towed, put the vehicle height
Only when you cannot receive a towing
in the “N” (Normal) mode and push
service from a Toyota dealer or com-
the height control switch to turn off
mercial tow truck service, tow your ve-
the active height control system.
hicle carefully in accordance with the
Otherwise, the vehicle height may be
instructions given in “—Emergency tow-
changed in the automatic leveling
ing” on page 288.
function, resulting in an accident. For
—From rear
Proper equipment will help ensure that details, see “Active height control
your vehicle is not damaged while being suspension” on page 158.
towed. Commercial operators are generally
aware of the state/provincial and local
(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck
laws pertaining to towing.
Use a towing dolly under the wheels not
Your vehicle can be damaged if it is
lifted by the truck.
towed incorrectly. Although most operators
know the correct procedure, it is possible (b) Using flat bed truck
(b) Using flat bed truck
to make a mistake. To avoid damage to
your vehicle, make sure the following pre-
cautions are observed. If necessary, show
this page to the tow truck driver.
TOWING PRECAUTIONS:
Use a safety chain system for all towing,
and abide by the state/provincial and local
laws. The wheels and axle on the ground
must be in good condition. If they are
damaged, use a towing dolly.

287
 —Emergency towing
(c) Towing with sling type
CAUTION
truck
Use extreme caution when towing ve-
hicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would place
excessive stress on the emergency
towing hook and towing cable or
chain. The hook and towing cable or
chain may break and cause serious
injury or damage.

NOTICE
(c) Towing with sling type truck If towing is necessary, we recommend z Do not use front and rear eyelets.
you to have it done by your Toyota It is not designed for towing.
NOTICE dealer or a commercial tow truck ser-
vice. z Use only a cable or chain specifi-
Do not tow with sling type truck, ei- cally intended for use in towing ve-
ther from the front or rear. This may If towing service is not available in an hicles. Securely fasten the cable or
cause body damage. emergency, your vehicle may be tempo- chain to the towing hook provided.
rarily towed by a cable or chain se-
cured to front emergency towing hook. z Never tow a vehicle from the rear
with four wheels on the ground.
Use extreme caution when towing the
This may cause serious damage to
vehicle.
the transmission.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it
and operate the brakes.
Before towing, release the parking brake
Towing in this manner may be done only and put the transmission in “N”. Unlock
on hard- surfaced roads for a short dis- the center differential. The key must be in
tance and at low speeds. Also, the “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” (engine run-
wheels, axles, drive train, steering and ning).
brakes must all be in good condition.
288
 —Emergency towing hook
precautions
D Before emergency towing, check that
CAUTION the hook is not broken or damage and CAUTION
that the installation bolts are not loose.
If the engine is not running, the pow- If the emergency towing hook is used
er assist for the brakes and steering
D Fasten the towing cable or chain se- to get out when your vehicle becomes
curely to the hook.
will not work so steering and braking struck in mud, sand or other condi-
will be much harder than usual. D Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and tion from which the vehicle cannot be
even force. driven out under its own power, make
D To avoid damaging the hook, do not sure to observe the precautions men-
pull from the side or at a vertical tioned below. Otherwise, excessive
angle. Always pull straight ahead. stress will be put on the hook and
the towing cable or chain may break,
causing serious injury or damage.
D If the towing vehicle can hardly
move, do not forcibly continue the
towing. Contact your Toyota dealer
or a commercial tow truck service
for assistance.
D Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.
D Keep away from the vehicle during
towing.

289
 If you cannot shift automatic
—Tips for towing a stuck vehicle transmission selector lever
The following methods are effective to
use when your vehicle is stuck in the
mud, sand or other condition from
which the vehicle cannot be driven out
under its own power. Use extreme cau-
tion when towing the vehicles. In addi-
tion, keep away from the vehicles and
towing cable or chain when towing.
D Remove the sand soil in the front and
the back of the tires.
D Place stones or wood under the tires.

If you cannot shift the selector lever 3. Insert your finger into the hole to
out of “P” position to other positions push down the shift lock override
even though the brake pedal is de- button. You can shift out of “P”
pressed, use the shift lock override but- position only while pushing the but-
ton as follows: ton.
1. Turn the ignition key to “LOCK” 4. Shift into “N” position.
position. Make sure the parking 5. Reinstall the cover.
brake is applied.
6. Start the engine. For your safety,
2. Pry up the cover with a flathead keep the brake pedal depressed.
screwdriver or equivalent.
Be sure to have the system checked by
your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

290
If you lose your keys
You can purchase a new key at your
Toyota dealer if you can give them the
key number and master key.
Even if you lose only one key, contact
your Toyota dealer to make a new key. If
you lose all your master keys, you cannot
make new keys; the whole engine immobi-
lizer system must be replaced.
See the suggestion given in “Keys” on
page 10.
You can use the wireless remote control
system with the new key. Contact your
Toyota dealer for detailed information.
If your keys are locked in the vehicle and
you cannot get a duplicate, many Toyota
dealers can still open the door for you,
using their special tools. If you must
break a window to get in, we suggest
breaking the smallest side window be-
cause it is the least expensive to replace.
Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from
the glass.

291
292
 SECTION 5
CORROSION PREVENTION AND
APPEARANCE CARE
Protecting your Toyota from corrosionn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Washing and waxing your Toyota . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

293
Protecting your Toyota from
corrosion
Toyota, through its diligent research, de- D Wetness or dampness to certain parts D High pressure water or steam is effec-
sign and use of the most advanced of your vehicle for an extended period tive for cleaning the vehicle’s underside
technology available, helps prevent corro- of time, may cause corrosion even and wheel housings. Pay particular
sion and provides you with the finest qual- though other parts of the vehicle may attention to these areas as it is difficult
ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up to be dry. to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
you. Proper care of your Toyota can help D High ambient temperatures can cause more harm than good to simply wet the
ensure long- term corrosion prevention. corrosion to those components of the mud and debris without removing. The
The most common causes of corrosion vehicle which do not dry quickly due to lower edge of doors, rocker panels and
to your vehicle are: lack of proper ventilation. frame members have drain holes which
should not be allowed to clog with dirt
D The accumulation of road salt, dirt and The above signifies the necessity to keep as trapped water in these areas can
moisture in hard- to- reach areas under your vehicle, particularly the underside, as cause corrosion.
the vehicle. clean as possible and to repair any dam-
age to paint or protective coatings as D Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-
D Chipping of paint, or undercoating oughly when winter is over.
caused by minor accidents or by soon as possible.
stones and gravel. To help prevent corrosion on your See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” on
Toyota, follow these guidelines: page 295 for more tips.
Care is especially important if you live
in particular areas or operate your ve- Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, of Check the condition of your vehicle’s
hicle under certain environmental condi- course, necessary to keep your vehicle paint and trim. If you find any chips or
tions: clean by regular washing, but to prevent scratches in the paint, touch them up im-
corrosion, the following points should be mediately to prevent corrosion from start-
D Road salt or dust control chemicals will ing. If the chips or scratches have gone
accelerate corrosion, as will the pres- observed:
through the bare metal, have a qualified
ence of salt in the air near the sea- D If you drive on salted roads in the body shop make the repair.
coast or in areas of industrial pollution. winter or if you live near the ocean,
D High humidity accelerates corrosion es- you should hose off the undercarriage
pecially when temperatures range just at least once a month to minimize cor-
above the freezing point. rosion.

294
 Washing and waxing your
Toyota
Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa- Washing your Toyota 1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-
ter and dirt can accumulate under the Keep your vehicle clean by regular move any mud or road salt from the
floor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc- washing. underside of the vehicle or the wheel
casionally check under the mats to make wells.
sure the area is dry. Be particularly care- The following cases may cause weakness
to the paint or corrosion to the body and 2. Wash with a mild car- wash soap,
ful when transporting chemicals, cleans- mixed according to the manufacturer’s
ers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should be parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-
sible. instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and
transported in proper containers. If a spill keep it wet by dipping it frequently into
or leak should occur, immediately clean D When driving in a coastal area the wash water. Do not rub hard—let
and dry the area. D When driving on a road sprinkled with the soap and water remove the dirt.
Use mud shields on your wheels. If you antifreeze Fuel filler door: Do not apply water
drive on salted or gravel roads, mud D When exposed to coal tar, tree sap, (high- pressure car wash, for example) at
shields help protect your vehicle. Full- size bird droppings and carcass of an insect or near the fuel tank inlet with the fuel
shields, which come as near to the ground filler door opened. If the water enters the
as possible, are the best. We recommend D When driving in areas where there is
a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust or air vent, you may experience trouble with
that the fittings and the area where the refueling or rough engine idling.
shields are installed be treated to resist chemical substances
corrosion. Your Toyota dealer will be D When the vehicle becomes remarkably Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic
happy to assist in supplying and installing dirty with dust and mud wheel ornaments are damaged easily by
the shields if they are recommended for organic substances. If any organic sub-
Hand- washing your Toyota stances splash an ornament, be sure to
your area.
Work in the shade and wait until the wash them off with water and check if the
Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated vehicle body is not warm to the touch. ornament is damaged.
garage or a roofed place. Do not park
your vehicle in a damp, poorly venti- Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap
CAUTION or neutral detergent.
lated garage. If you wash your vehicle in
the garage, or if you drive it covered with Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do not
When cleaning under floor or chassis,
water or snow, your garage may be so scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper
be careful not to injure your hands.
damp as to cause corrosion. Even if your faces are soft.
garage is heated, a wet vehicle can cor-
rode if the ventilation is poor.

295
Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do not Automatic car wash Waxing your Toyota
use organic substances or scrub them Your vehicle may be washed in an auto- Polishing and waxing is recommended
with a hard brush. This may damage the matic car wash, but remember that the to maintain the original beauty of your
surfaces of the lights. paint can be scratched by some types of Toyota’s finish.
Road tar: Remove with turpentine or brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle
cleaners that are marked safe for painted washing process itself. Scratching reduces surface does not repel water well.
surfaces. paint durability and gloss, especially on
darker colors. The manager of the car 1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-
3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap can fore you begin waxing, even if you are
cause streaking. In hot weather you wash should be able to advise you wheth-
er the process is safe for the paint on using a combined cleaner and wax.
may need to rinse each section right
after you wash it. your vehicle. 2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If
the finish has become extremely weath-
4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle NOTICE ered, use a car- cleaning polish, fol-
using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-
rub or press hard—you might scratch To prevent damage to the antenna,
low the manufacturer’s instructions and
the paint. make sure it is retracted before driv-
precautions. Be sure to polish and wax
ing your Toyota through an automatic
the chrome trim as well as the paint.
NOTICE car wash.
Windshield washer nozzles: Make sure
z Do not use organic substances that the nozzles do not become blocked
(gasoline kerosene, benzine or when waxing. If a nozzle becomes
strong solvents) which may be toxic blocked, contact your Toyota dealer to
or cause damage. have the vehicle serviced.
z Do not scrub any part of the ve-
hicle with a hard brush, which may NOTICE
cause damage. If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not
try to clear it with a pin or other
object. The nozzle will be damaged.

296
 Cleaning the interior
3. Wax the vehicle again when water Vinyl interior
does not bead but remains on the sur- CAUTION
The vinyl upholstery may be easily
face in large patches. cleaned with a mild soap or detergent
D Vehicles with side airbags and cur-
and water.
NOTICE tain shield airbags:
First vacuum over the upholstery to re-
Be careful not to splash water or
Always remove the plastic bumpers if move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or
spill liquid on the floor. This may
your vehicle is re- painted and placed soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the
in a high heat paint waxing booth. prevent the side and curtain shield
vinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a few
High temperatures could damage the airbags from activating correctly, re-
sulting in serious injury. minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt
bumpers. and wipe off the soap with a clean damp
D Do not wash the vehicle floor with cloth. If all the dirt do not come off, re-
Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on the water, or allow water to get onto peat the procedure. Commercial foaming-
surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause the floor when cleaning the vehicle type vinyl cleaners are also available
damage to the lenses. If you accidentally interior or exterior. Water may get which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s
put wax on the light surfaces, wipe or into audio components or other instructions.
wash it off. electrical components above or un-
der the floor carpet (or mat) and NOTICE
cause a malfunction; and it may
cause body corrosion. Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline
or window cleaner on the interior.

297
Carpets
NOTICE NOTICE
Use a good foam- type shampoo to
clean the carpets. z Do not use dye or bleach on the z Do not use organic substances (sol-
belts—it may weaken them. vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,
Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove
z Do not use the belts until they be- etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
as much dirt as possible. Several types of
come dry. These chemicals can cause discol-
foam cleaners are available; some are in
oring, staining or peeling of the
aerosol cans and others are powders or
surface.
liquids which you mix with water to pro- Windows
duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets, z If you use cleaners or polishing
The windows may be cleaned with any agents, make sure their ingredients
use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.
household window cleaner. do not include the substances men-
Rub in overlapping circles.
tioned above.
Do not apply water—the best results are NOTICE
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as z If you use a liquid car freshener, do
possible. Read the shampoo instructions When cleaning the inside of the rear not spill the liquid onto the ve-
and follow them closely. window, be careful not to scratch or hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-
damage the heater wires or connec- tain the ingredients mentioned
Seat belts tors. above. Immediately clean any spill
The seat belts may be cleaned with using the method mentioned above.
mild soap and water or with lukewarm Air conditioning control panel, audio
water. system, instrument panel, console pan-
Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean- el, and switches
ing, check the belts for excessive wear, Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.
fraying, or cuts.
Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-
warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

298
Leather Interior
z Mildew may develop on soiled leath-
The leather upholstery may be cleaned er upholstery. Be especially careful
with neutral detergent for wool. to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your
Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened upholstery always clean.
with 5% solution of neutral detergent for z Long exposure to direct sunlight
wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces may cause the leather surface to
of detergent with a clean damp cloth. harden and shrink. Keep your ve-
After cleaning or whenever any part of the hicle in a shaded area, especially in
leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean the summer.
cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti- z The interior of your vehicle is apt
lated shaded area. to heat up on hot summer days, so
avoid placing on the upholstery
NOTICE
items made of vinyl or plastic or
z If a stain should fail to come out containing wax as these tend to
with a neutral detergent, apply a stick to leather when warm.
cleaner that does not contain an z Improper cleaning of the leather up-
organic solvent. holstery could result in discolor-
z Never use organic substances such ation or staining.
as benzine, alcohol or gasoline, or
alkaline or acid solutions for clean- If you have any questions about the
ing the leather as these could cleaning of your Toyota, your local
cause discoloring. Toyota dealer will be pleased to answer
z Use of a nylon brush or synthetic them.
fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the
fine grained surface of the leather.

299
300
 SECTION 6
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE
Maintenance requirementss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Does your vehicle need repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . . . . 306

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the

“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

301
Maintenance requirements
Your Toyota vehicle has been designed for Scheduled maintenance Where to go for service?
fewer maintenance requirements with long- The scheduled maintenance items listed in Toyota technicians are well- trained spe-
er service intervals to save both your time the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or cialists and are kept up to date with the
and money. However, each regular mainte- “Owner’s Manual Supplement” are those latest service information through technical
nance, as well as day- to- day care, is required to be serviced at regular inter- bulletins, service tips, and in- dealership
more important than ever before to ensure vals. training programs. They learn to work on
smooth, trouble- free, safe, and economical Toyotas before they work on your vehicle,
driving. For details of your maintenance schedule,
read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” rather than while they are working on it.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. You can be confident that your Toyota
sure the specified maintenance, including dealer’s service department performs the
general maintenance service, is performed. It is recommended that only genuine
Toyota parts be used for maintenance best job to meet the maintenance require-
Note that both the new vehicle and ments on your vehicle–reliably and eco-
emission control system warranties specify or for the repair of the emission con-
trol system. nomically.
that proper maintenance and care must be
performed. See “Owner’s Warranty The owner may elect to use non- Toyota Your copy of the repair order is proof that
Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual supplied parts for replacement pur- all required maintenance has been per-
Supplement” for complete warranty poses without invalidating the emission formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-
information. control system warranty. However, use lems should arise with your vehicle while
of replacement parts which are not of under warranty, your Toyota dealer will
General maintenance promptly take care of it. Again, be sure
equivalent quality may impair the effec-
General maintenance items are those day- tiveness of the emission control sys- to keep a copy of the repair order for any
to- day care practices that are important to tems. service performed on your Toyota.
your vehicle for proper operation. It is the What about do- it- yourself maintenance?
owner’s responsibility to ensure that the You may also elect to have mainte-
general maintenance items are performed nance, replacement, or repair of the Many of the maintenance items are easy
regularly. emission control devices and system to do yourself if you have a little mechani-
performed by any automotive repair es- cal ability and a few basic automotive
These checks or inspections can be done tablishment or individual without invali- tools. Simple instructions for how to per-
either by yourself or a qualified technician, dating this warranty. See “Owner’s War- form them are presented in Section 7.
or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will be ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s
pleased to do them at a nominal cost. Manual Supplement” for complete war-
ranty information.
302
 General maintenance
If you are a skilled do- it- yourself Listed below are the general maintenance Engine coolant level
mechanic, the Toyota service manuals are items that should be performed as fre- Make sure the coolant level is between
recommended. Please be aware that quently as specified. In addition to check- the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the see-
do- it- yourself maintenance can affect your ing the items listed, if you notice any through reservoir when the engine is cold.
warranty coverage. See “Owner’s Warranty unusual noise, smell or vibration, you See page 316 for additional information.
Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual should investigate the cause or take your Radiator, condenser and hoses
Supplement” for the details. vehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali- Check that the front of the radiator and
fied service shop immediately. It is recom- condenser are clean and not blocked with
mended that any problem you notice be leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 317 for
brought to the attention of your dealer or additional information.
the qualified service shop for their advice.
Battery electrolyte level
Make sure the electrolyte level of all bat-
CAUTION
tery cells is between upper and lower lev-
el lines on the case. Add only distilled
Make these checks only with ade-
water when replenishing. See page 330 for
quate ventilation if you run the en-
additional information.
gine.
Brake fluid level
Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.
IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
See page 318 for additional information.
Items listed below should be checked
Engine oil level
from time to time, e.g. each time when
Check the level on the dipstick with the
refueling.
engine turned off and the vehicle parked
Washer fluid on a level ground. See page 314 for addi-
Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the tional information.
tank. See page 333 for additional informa-
Power steering fluid level
tion.
Check the level through the reservoir. The
level should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”
range depending on the fluid temperature.
See page 319 for additional information.

303
Exhaust system Seats Parking brake
If you notice any change in the sound of Check that all front seat controls such as Check that the lever has the proper travel
the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. op- and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle
the cause located and corrected immedi- erate smoothly and that all latches lock is held securely with only the parking
ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” on securely in any position. Check that the brake applied.
page 229.) head restraint move up and down smooth- Automatic transmission “Park” mecha-
INSIDE THE VEHICLE ly and that the locks hold securely in any nism
latched position. For folding- down rear Check the lock release button of the se-
Items listed below should be checked seatbacks, swing- up rear seat cushions
regularly, e.g. while performing periodic lector lever for proper and smooth opera-
and detachable third seats, check that the tion. On a safe incline, check that your
services, cleaning the vehicle, etc. latches lock securely. vehicle is held securely with the selector
Lights Seat belts lever in “P” position and all brakes re-
Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail Check that the seat belt system such as leased.
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights buckles, retractors and anchors operate
are all working. Check headlight aim. OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt
Service reminder indicators and warning webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or dam- Items listed below should be performed
buzzers aged. from time to time, unless otherwise
Check that all service reminder indicators specified.
Accelerator pedal
and warning buzzers function properly. Check the pedal for smooth operation and Fluid leaks
Steering wheel uneven pedal effort or catching. Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-
Be alert for changes in steering condition, ter or other fluid after the vehicle has
Brake pedal been parked for a while. If you smell fuel
such as hard steering or strange noise. Check the pedal for smooth operation and fumes or notice any leak, have the cause
that the pedal has the proper clearance. found and corrected immediately.
Check the brake booster function.
Doors and engine hood
Brakes Check that all doors and back door oper-
In a safe place, check that the brakes do ate smoothly and all latches lock securely.
not pull to one side when applied. Make sure the engine hood secondary
latch secures the hood from opening when
the primary latch is released.

304
 Does your vehicle need
repairing?
Tire inflation pressure Be on the alert for changes in perfor- D Engine continually runs hot; oil pres-
Check the pressure with a gauge ev- mance, sounds, and visual tip- offs that sure gauge stays low
ery two weeks, or at least once a indicate service is needed. Some impor- If you notice any of these clues, take your
month. See page 320 for additional tant clues are as follows: vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as
information. D Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging possible. It probably needs adjustment or
D Appreciable loss of power repair.
Tire surface and wheel nuts
Check the tires carefully for cuts, D Strange engine noises
CAUTION
damage or excessive wear. See page D A fluid leak under the vehicle (however,
323 for additional information. When water dripping from the air conditioning Do not continue driving with the ve-
checking the tires, make sure no nuts after use is normal.) hicle unchecked. It could result in se-
are missing, and check the nuts for D Change in exhaust sound (This may rious vehicle damage and possibly
looseness. Tighten them if necessary. indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide personal injury.
Tire rotation leak. Drive with the windows open and
Rotate the tires according to the have the exhaust system checked im-
maintenance schedule. (For sched- mediately.)
uled maintenance information, please D Flat- looking tire; excessive tire squeal
refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance when cornering; uneven tire wear
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple- D Vehicle pulls to one side when driving
ment”.) See page 325 for additional straight on a level road
information. D Strange noises related to suspension
movement
D Loss of brake effectiveness; spongy
feeling brake pedal; pedal almost
touches floor; vehicle pulls to one side
when braking
D Engine coolant temperature continually
higher than normal

305
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission in- The malfunction indicator lamp will go off
spection programs which include OBD after taking several driving trips, but the
(On- Board Diagnostics) checks. error code in the OBD system will not be
The OBD system monitors the operation cleared unless about 40 trips or more are
of the emission control system. When the taken.
OBD system determines that a problem If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
exists somewhere in the emission control even the malfunction indicator lamp does
system, the malfunction indicator lamp not come on, contact your Toyota dealer
comes on. In this case, your vehicle may to prepare the vehicle for re- testing.
not pass the I/M test and need to be
repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to
service the vehicle.
Even if the malfunction indicator lamp
does not come on, your vehicle may not
pass the I/M test as readiness codes
have not been set in the OBD system.
Readiness codes are automatically set
during ordinary driving. However, when the
battery is disconnected or run down, the
codes are erased. Also, depending on
your driving habits, the codes may not be
completely set.
Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had
come on recently due to temporary mal-
function such as a loose fuel tank cap,
your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

306
 SECTION 7- 1
DO- IT- YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Introduction
Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Fuse locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Do- it- yourself service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

307
Engine compartment overview
1. Suspension fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Fuse block
5. Battery
6. Windshield and rear window washer
fluid tank
7. Engine oil level dipstick
8. Condenser

71C004f 9. Radiator
10. Engine coolant reservoir
11. Power steering fluid reservoir

308
Fuse locations
Spare fuses
1

i71002d

Spare fuses

71C510a

309
Do- it- yourself service
precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself,
be sure to follow the correct procedure CAUTION D Do not get under your vehicle with
given in this section. just the body jack supporting it. Al-
D When the engine is running, keep ways use automotive jack stands or
You should be aware that improper or in- other solid supports.
hands, clothing, and tools away
complete servicing may result in operating
from the moving fan and engine D Be sure that the ignition is off if
problems.
drive belts. (Removing rings, you work near the electric cooling
Performing do- it- yourself maintenance watches, and ties is advisable.) fan or radiator grille. With the igni-
during the warranty period may affect your tion on, the electric cooling fan will
D Right after driving, the engine
warranty coverage. Read the separate compartment—the engine, radiator, automatically start to run if the air
Toyota Warranty statement for details and conditioning is on.
exhaust manifold, power steering
suggestions.
fluid reservoir and spark plug D Use eye protection whenever you
This part gives instructions only for those boots, etc.—will be hot. So be care- work on or under your vehicle
items that are relatively easy for an owner ful not to touch them. Oil, fluids where you may be exposed to flying
to perform. As explained in Section 6, and spark plugs may also be hot. or falling material, fluid spray, etc.
there are still a number of items that must D Used engine oil contains potentially
D If the engine is hot, do not remove harmful contaminants which may
be done by a qualified technician with
the radiator cap or loosen the drain cause skin disorders such as in-
special tools.
plugs to prevent burning yourself. flammation or skin cancer, so care
For information on tools and parts for do-
D Do not leave anything that may should be taken to avoid prolonged
it- yourself maintenance, see “Parts and
burn easily, such as paper or rags, and repeated contact with it. To re-
tools” on page 311. move used engine oil from your
in the engine compartment.
Utmost care should be taken when work- skin, wash thoroughly with soap
D Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-
ing on your vehicle to prevent accidental low open flames around fuel or the and water.
injury. Here are a few precautions that
battery. Their fumes are flammable. D Do not leave used oil within the
you should be especially careful to ob- reach of children.
serve: D Be extremely cautious when work-
ing on the battery. It contains poi-
sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

310
 Parts and tools
Here is a list of parts and tools you will
D Dispose of used oil and filter only z Do not pry the outer electrode of a need to perform do- it- yourself mainte-
in a safe and acceptable manner. spark plug against the center elec- nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-
Do not dispose of used oil and fil- trode. signed in metric sizes, so your tools must
ter in household trash, in sewers or z Use only spark plugs of the speci- be metric.
onto the ground. Call your dealer or fied type. Using other types will CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
a service station for information cause engine damage, loss of per-
concerning recycling or disposal. formance or radio noise. Parts (if level is low):
z Do not reuse iridium- tipped spark D “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-
plugs by cleaning or regapping. lent. See “Checking the engine oil lev-
NOTICE el” on page 314 for instructions.
z Do not overfill automatic transmis-
z Remember that battery and ignition sion fluid, transfer oil and power Tools:
cables carry high currents or volt- steering fluid, or the transmission, D Rag or paper towel
ages. Be careful of accidentally transfer and power steering could
causing a short circuit. D Funnel (only for adding oil)
be damaged.
z Add only “Toyota Super Long Life CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT LEV-
z Do not drive with the air cleaner EL
Coolant” or similar high quality eth- filter removed, or excessive engine
ylene glycol based non- silicate, wear could result. Also backfiring Parts (if level is low):
non- amine, non- nitrite and non- bo- could cause a fire in the engine D “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or
rate coolant with long- life hybrid compartment. similar high quality ethylene glycol
organic acid technology to fill the based non- silicate, non- amine, non- ni-
radiator. “Toyota Super Long Life z Be careful not to scratch the glass
surface with the wiper frame. trite, and non- borate coolant with long-
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% cool- life hybrid organic acid technology.
ant and 50% deionized water. z When closing the engine hood,
check to see that you have not for- “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a
z If you spill some of the coolant, be mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion-
sure to wash it off with water to gotten any tools, rags, etc.
ized water.
prevent it from damaging the parts
or paint.
z Do not allow dirt or anything else
to fall through the plug holes.

311
Tools: CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES
D Funnel (only for adding coolant) Parts (if replacement is necessary):
CHECKING BRAKE FLUID D Fuse with same amperage rating as
Parts (if level is low): original

D SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 ADDING WASHER FLUID

brake fluid Parts:
Tools: D Water
D Rag or paper towel D Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for
D Funnel (only for adding fluid) winter use)

CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID Tools:

Parts (if level is low): D Funnel
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONR II REPLACING LIGHT BULBS
or III Parts:
Tools: D Bulb with same number and wattage
D Rag or paper towel rating as original (See charts in “Re-
placing light bulbs” on page 333.)
D Funnel (only for adding fluid)
Tools:
CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION
D Screwdriver
Tools:
D Warm water
D Baking soda
D Grease
D Conventional wrench (for terminal
clamp bolts)

312
 SECTION 7- 2
DO- IT- YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Engine and Chassis
Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Checking the radiator and condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Checking suspension fluid AHC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Checking power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Installing snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Aluminum wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

313
Checking the engine oil level
Low level Full level NOTICE
Be careful not to drop engine oil on
the vehicle components.

If the oil level is below or only slightly

above the low level, add engine oil of
the same type as already in the engine.
Remove the oil filler cap and add engine
oil in small quantities at a time, checking
Add oil O.K. Too full the dipstick. We recommend that you use
a funnel when adding the oil.
The approximate quantity of oil needed to
With the engine at operating tempera- 3. Standing up on the left side of the raise the level between low and full on the
ture and turned off, check the oil level vehicle, reinsert the dipstick in the di- dipstick is indicated as follows:
on the dipstick. rection so that the “ENGINE OIL” on 1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 Imp.qt.)
1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle top should be read correctly and push
it in as far as it will go, or the reading For the engine oil capacity, see “Service
should be on level ground. After turning specifications” on page 341.
off the engine, wait a few minutes for will not be correct.
the oil to drain back into the bottom of 4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil When the level reaches within the correct
the engine. level while holding a rag under the range, install the filler cap hand- tight.
2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under end.
NOTICE
the end and wipe it clean.
CAUTION z Be careful not to spill engine oil on
the vehicle components.
Be careful not to touch the hot ex-
z Avoid overfilling, or the engine
haust manifold.
could be damaged.
z Check the oil level on the dipstick
once again after adding the oil.

314
ENGINE OIL SELECTION SAE 5W- 30 is the best choice for good
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in fuel economy, and good starting in cold
your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved weather.
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent If SAE 5W- 30 oil is not available, SAE
to satisfy the following grade and viscos- 10W- 30 oil may be used. However, it
ity. should be replaced with SAE 5W- 30 at
Oil grade: the next oil change.
API grade, SL “Energy- Conserving” or
ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity:
SAE 5W- 30

API service symbol

Outside temperature

ILSAC certification mark

315
 Checking the engine coolant
level
Oil identification marks Look at the see- through coolant reser-
Either or both API registered marks are voir when the engine is cold. The cool-
added to some oil containers to help ant level is satisfactory if it is between
you select the oil you should use. the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the
reservoir. If the level is low, add the
The API Service Symbol is located any- coolant. (For the coolant type, see
where on the outside of the container. “Coolant type selection” described be-
The top portion of the label shows the oil low.)
quality by API (American Petroleum Insti- The coolant level in the reservoir will vary
tute) designations such as SL. The center with engine temperature. However, if the
portion of the label shows the SAE viscos- level is on or below the “LOW” line, add
ity grade such as SAE 5W- 30. “Energy- coolant. Bring the level up to the “FULL”
Conserving” shown in the lower portion, line.
indicates that the oil has fuel- saving ca-
pabilities. If the coolant level drops within a short
To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-
mance for your engine, “Toyota Genuine time after replenishing, there may be a
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan- leak in the system. Visually check the
dardization and Approval Committee) Certi- Motor Oil” is available, which has been
radiator, hoses, radiator cap and drain
fication Mark is displayed on the front of specifically tested and approved for all
Toyota engines. cock and water pump.
the container.
If you can find no leak, have your Toyota
Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-
ther details about “Toyota Genuine Motor dealer test the cap pressure and check
for leaks in the cooling system.
Oil”.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do not

remove the radiator cap when the en-
gine is hot.

316
 Checking the radiator and
condenser
Coolant type selection If any of the above parts are extremely
Use of improper coolants may damage dirty or you are not sure of their condi-
your engine cooling system. tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

CAUTION
or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non- silicate, non- amine, non- nitrite, To prevent burning yourself, be care-
and non- borate coolant with long- life
ful not to touch the radiator or con-
hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant
denser when the engine is hot.
with long- life hybrid organic acid
technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.) NOTICE
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mix-
ture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized To prevent damage to the radiator
water. This coolant provides protection Toyota recommends “Toyota Super Long
and condenser, do not perform the
down to about –35°C (–31°F). Life Coolant”, which has been tested to
work by yourself.
ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor
NOTICE result in malfunction of your engine cool-
ant system with proper usage. “Toyota Su-
Do not use plain water alone.
per Long Life Coolant” is formulated with
long- life hybrid organic acid technology
and has been specifically designed to
avoid engine cooling system malfunction
on Toyota vehicles.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-
ther details.

317
Checking suspension fluid
AHC Checking brake fluid
NOTICE
Only use the Suspension fluid AHC
for the active height control suspen-
sion. If you fill other fluids such as
brake fluid, automatic transmission
fluid, power steering fluid, engine oil,
etc., the active height control suspen-
sion could be damaged.

Under the unloaded condition, check To check the fluid level, simply look at
the suspension fluid AHC in the follow- the see- through reservoir. The level
ing way. should be between the “MAX” and
1. Start the engine and put the vehicle “MIN” lines on the reservoir.
height in the “LO” (Low) mode and It is normal for the brake fluid level to go
then “N” (Normal) mode. down slightly as the brake pads wear or
2. Turn off the ignition switch about 30 when the fluid level in the accumulator is
seconds after the “N” (Normal) mode high.
indicator light comes on. If the reservoir needs frequent refueling,
3. Make sure the fluid level is between it may indicate a serious mechanical prob-
“MAX” and “MIN”. lem.
If the fluid level is lower than “MIN”, have
suspension fluid AHC filled by your Toyota
dealer.

318
 Checking power steering fluid
If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or
NOTICE
FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 brake fluid to
the brake reservoir. If you spill some of the fluid, be sure If cold
Refilling brake fluid: to wipe it off to prevent it from dam- If hot O.K.
O.K. Open
aging the parts or paintwork. Close
1. Turn the ignition switch off.
2. Depress the brake pedal more than 40
times.
3. Remove the reservoir cap by hand.
Add brake fluid up to the “MAX” line. If cold
If you do not follow the procedure above, If hot add
the reservoir may overflow. add
Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once
opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from Check the fluid level on the dipstick. If
the air, and excess moisture can cause a necessary, add automatic transmission
dangerous loss of braking. fluid DEXRONrII or III.
If the vehicle has been driven around 80
CAUTION km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little
more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is
Take care when filling the brake fluid hot (60_C–80_C or 140_F–175_F). You
reservoir because brake fluid can may also check the level when the fluid
harm your hands or eyes. If fluid gets is cold (about room temperature,
on your hands or in your eyes, flush 10_C–30_C or 50_F–85_F) if the engine
the affected area with clean water im- has not been run for about five hours.
mediately. If you still feel uncomfort-
able with your hands or eyes, go to
the doctor.

319
 Checking tire inflation pres-
sure
Clean all dirt from outside of the reservoir
tank and look at the fluid level. If the fluid CAUTION
is cold, the level should be in the “COLD”
range. Similarly, if it is hot, the fluid level The reservoir tank may be hot so be
should be in the “HOT” range. If the level careful not to burn yourself.
is at the low side of either range, add
automatic transmission fluid DEXRONrII
or III to bring the level within the range. NOTICE
To remove the reservoir cap, turn it coun- Avoid overfilling, or the power steer-
terclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it, ing could be damaged.
turn it clockwise. After replacing the filler
cap, visually check the steering box case,
vane pump and hose connections for 72c502b
leaks or damage.

320
Keep your tire inflation pressures D Always use a tire inflation pres- Tire inflation
at the proper level. sure gauge. The appearance of pressure gauge
The recommended cold tire inflation a tire can be misleading. Besides,
pressures, tire sizes and the com- tire inflation pressures that are
bined weight of occupants and cargo even just a few pounds off can de-
(vehicle capacity weight) are de- grade ride and handling.
scribed on page 344 and 340. They D Do not bleed or reduce tire
are also described on the tire and inflation pressure after driving.
loading information label as shown. It is normal for the tire inflation
You should check the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
pressures every two weeks, or at D Never exceed the vehicle capac-
least once a month. And do not forget ity weight. The passenger and
the spare! luggage weight should be located INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
The following instructions for so that the vehicle is balanced. PROCEDURE
checking tire inflation pressure 1. Remove the tire valve cap.
should be observed:
2. Press the tip of the tire inflation
D The pressure should be pressure gauge to the tire valve.
checked only when the tires are
cold. If your vehicle has been 3. Read the pressure using a gradua-
parked for at least 3 hours and has tion of the gauge.
not been driven for more than 1.5 4. In case that the tire inflation pres-
km or 1 mile since, you will get sure is not within the prescribed
an accurate cold tire inflation pres- range, insert the compressed air
sure reading. from the valve. In case of applying
too much air, press the center of
the valve and release the air to ad-
just.

321
5. After completing the tire inflation
pressure measurement and adjust- CAUTION High tire pressure (overinfla-
ment, apply soap water to the tion)—
valve and check the leakage. Keep your tires properly inflated. D Poor handling
Otherwise, the following condi-
6. Install the tire valve cap. tions may occur and cause an ac- D Excessive wear
If the gauge and the air pump are not cident resulting in death or seri- D Uneven wear
available, have your vehicle checked ous injuries. D A greater possibility of tire
by your Toyota dealer. Low tire pressure (underinfla- damage from road hazards
tion)—
CAUTION
D Excessive wear
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve D Uneven wear
caps. Without the valve caps, dirt D Poor handling
or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage. D Possibility of blowouts from an
If the caps have been lost, have overheated tire
new ones put on as soon as pos- D Poor sealing of the tire bead
sible. D Wheel deformation and/or tire
separation
Incorrect tire inflation pressure may D A greater possibility of tire
waste fuel, reduce the comfort of driv- damage from road hazards
ing, reduce tire life and make your ve-
hicle less safe to drive.
If a tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by your Toyota deal-
er.

322
Checking and replacing tires
The tires on your Toyota have built- in If air loss occurs while driving, do not
Tread wear indicator tread wear indicators to help you continue driving. Driving even a short
know when the tires need replace- distance can damage a tire beyond
ment. When the tread depth wears to repair.
1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indica- Any tires which are over 6 years
tors will appear. If you can see the old must be checked by a qualified
indicators in two or more adjacent technician even if damage is not
grooves, the tire should be replaced. obvious.
The lower the tread, the higher the
risk of skidding. Tires deteriorate with age even if they
have never or seldom been used.
The effectiveness of snow tires is
lost if the tread wears down below This also applies to the spare tire and
4 mm (0.16 in.). tires stored for future use.
CHECKING YOUR TIRES REPLACING YOUR TIRES
If you have tire damage such as
Check the tire’s tread for tread cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to When replacing a tire, use a tire of
wear indicators. If the indicators expose the fabric, or bulges indi- the same size and construction,
show, replace the tires. The loca- cating internal damage, the tire and the same or greater maximum
tion of the tread wear indicators is should be replaced. load as the originally installed
shown by the “TWI” or “∆ ” marks, tires. Also, all the tires must be the
If a tire often goes flat or cannot be
etc., molded on the sidewall of same brand and have the same
each tire. properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage, it tread patterns.
should be replaced. If you are not
sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

323
Using any other size or type of tire Toyota recommends all four tires,
may seriously affect handling, ride, CAUTION or at least both front or rear tires
speedometer/odometer calibration, be replaced as a set.
ground clearance, and clearance be- Observe the following instruc-
tions. Otherwise, an accident See “If you have a flat tire” on page
tween the body and tires or snow 275 for tire change procedure.
chains. may occur resulting in death or
serious injuries. When a tire is replaced, the wheel
Check that the maximum load of the should always be balanced.
replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the D Do not mix radial, bias belted,
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) or bias- ply tires on your ve- An unbalanced wheel may affect ve-
of either the front axle or the rear hicle, as this may cause dan- hicle handling and tire life. Wheels
axle, whichever is greater. As for the gerous handling characteris- can get out of balance with regular
maximum load of the tire, see the load tics resulting in loss of control. use and should therefore be balanced
limit at maximum cold tire inflation D Do not use tires other than the occasionally.
pressure mentioned on the sidewall manufacturer’s recommended When replacing a tubeless tire, the
of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle size, as this may cause danger- air valve should also be replaced
Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the Cer- ous handling characteristics with a new one.
tification Label. For details about the resulting in loss of control.
sidewall of the tire and the Certifica- D Do not use tires of different
tion Label, see pages 238 and 236. brands, sizes, construction or
tread patterns, as this may
cause dangerous handling
characteristics resulting in
loss of control.

324
 Installing snow tires and
Rotating tires chains
See “If you have a flat tire” on page WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES OR
275 for tire change procedure. CHAINS
When rotating tires, check for uneven Snow tires or chains are recommended
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is when driving on snow or ice.
usually caused by incorrect tire infla- On wet or dry roads, conventional tires
tion pressure, improper wheel align- provide better traction than snow tires.
ment, out- of- balance wheels, or se- SNOW TIRE SELECTION
vere braking. If you need snow tires, select tires of
the same size, construction and load
capacity as the originally installed tires.
Also, all the tires must be the same
brand and have the same tread pat-
terns.
To equalize tire wear and help ex-
Do not use tires other than those men-
tend tire life, Toyota recommends tioned above. Do not install studded tires
that you rotate your tires accord- without first checking local regulations for
ing to the maintenance schedule. possible restrictions.
(For scheduled maintenance infor-
mation, please refer to the “Sched-
uled Maintenance Guide” or “Own-
er’s Manual Supplement”.)
However, the most appropriate tim-
ing for tire rotation may vary ac-
cording to your driving habits and
road surface conditions.

325
 SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION
CAUTION Side chain
Snow tires should be installed on all
wheels.
Observe the following instructions.
Otherwise, an accident may occur re- Installing snow tires on the rear wheels
sulting in death or serious injuries. only can lead to an excessive difference
D Do not use snow tires other than in road grip capability between the front
and rear tires which could cause loss of Cross chain
the manufacturer’s recommended
vehicle control.
size, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in When storing removed tires, you should
loss of control. store them in a cool dry space.
D Do not use snow tires of different Mark the direction of rotation and be sure
brands, sizes, construction or tread to install them in the same direction when
patterns, as this may cause danger- replacing.
ous handling characteristics result- TIRE CHAIN SELECTION
ing in loss of control. CAUTION Use the tire chains of correct size.
Use the following type chains.
D Do not drive with the snow tires
incorrectly inflated. For P275/60R18 111H tire
mm (in.)
D Never drive over 105 km/h (65 mph) A Diameter of side chain: 3.5 (0.14)
with any type of snow tires. B Diameter of cross chain: 4.0 (0.16)
Regulations regarding the use of tire
chains vary according to location or
type of road, so always check local reg-
ulations before installing chains.

326
 Replacing wheels
WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS
NOTICE CAUTION
If you have wheel damage such as
If the wrong combination of tire and bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the
chain is used, the chains could dam-
D Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or
wheel should be replaced.
the chain manufacturer’s recom-
age the vehicle body.
mended speed limit, whichever is If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,
lower. the tire may slip off the wheel or cause
CHAIN INSTALLATION loss of handling control.
D Drive carefully avoiding bumps,
Install the chains on the rear tires as holes, and sharp turns, which may WHEEL SELECTION
tightly as possible. Do not use tire cause the vehicle to bounce. When replacing wheels, care should be
chains on the front tires. Retighten
D Avoid sharp turns or locked- wheel taken to ensure that the wheels are re-
chains after driving 0.5 – 1.0 km (1/4 –
braking, as use of chains may ad- placed by ones with the same load ca-
1/2 mile).
versely affect vehicle handling. pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.
When installing chains on your tires, care-
D When driving with chains installed, Correct replacement wheels are available
fully follow the instructions of the chain
be sure to drive carefully. Slow at your Toyota dealer.
manufacturer.
down before entering curves to A wheel of a different size or type may
If wheel covers are used, they will be avoid losing control of the vehicle. adversely affect handling, wheel and bear-
scratched by the chain band, so remove Otherwise an accident may occur. ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-
the covers before putting on the chains.
eter calibration, stopping ability, headlight
aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-
ance, and tire or snow chain clearance to
the body and chassis.

327
 Aluminum wheel precautions
Replacement with used wheels is not rec- D When installing aluminum wheels,
ommended as they may have been sub- check that the wheel nuts are tight
jected to rough treatment or high mileage after driving your vehicle the first 1600
and could fail without warning. Also, bent km (1000 miles).
wheels which have been straightened may D If you have rotated, repaired, or
have structural damage and therefore changed your tires, check that the
should not be used. Never use an inner wheel nuts are still tight after driving
tube in a leaking wheel which is designed 1600 km (1000 miles).
for a tubeless tire.
D When using tire chains, be careful not
to damage the aluminum wheels.
CAUTION
D Use only Toyota wheel nuts and
Observe the following instructions. wrench designed for your aluminum
Otherwise, an accident may occur re- wheels.
sulting in death or serious injuries. D When balancing your wheels, use only
D Do not use wheels other than the Toyota balance weights or equivalent
manufacturer’s recommended size, and a plastic or rubber hammer.
as this may cause dangerous han- D As with any wheel, periodically check
dling characteristics resulting in your aluminum wheels for damage. If
loss of control. damaged, replace immediately.
D Do not use wheels of different
brands, sizes and types, as this
may cause dangerous handling
characteristics resulting in loss of
control.

328
 SECTION 7- 3
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Electrical components
Checking battery condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Battery recharging precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Checking and replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Replacing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

329
Checking battery condition—
—Precautions —Checking battery exterior

CAUTION D If electrolyte gets on your skin, Terminals Ground cable

thoroughly wash the contact area. If
BATTERY PRECAUTIONS you feel pain or burning, get medi-
The battery produces flammable and cal attention immediately.
explosive hydrogen gas. D If electrolyte gets on your clothes,
D Do not cause a spark from the bat- there is a possibility of its soaking
tery with tools. through to your skin, so immediate-
ly take off the exposed clothing and
D Do not smoke or light a match near follow the procedure above, if nec-
the battery. essary.
The electrolyte contains poisonous D If you accidentally swallow electro-
and corrosive sulfuric acid. lyte, drink a large quantity of water Hold- down clamp
D Avoid contact with eyes, skin or or milk. Follow with milk of magne-
clothes. sia, beaten raw egg or vegetable Check the battery for corroded or loose
oil. Then go immediately for emer- terminal connections, cracks, or loose
D Never ingest electrolyte. hold- down clamp.
gency help.
D Wear protective safety glasses when a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off
working near the battery. with a solution of warm water and bak-
D Keep children away from the bat- ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-
tery. nals with grease to prevent further cor-
EMERGENCY MEASURES rosion.

D If electrolyte gets in your eyes, b. If the terminal connections are loose,

flush your eyes with clean water tighten their clamp nuts—but do not
immediately and get immediate overtighten.
medical attention. If possible, con- c. Tighten the hold- down clamp only
tinue to apply water with a sponge enough to keep the battery firmly in
or cloth while en route to the medi- place. Overtightening may damage the
cal office. battery case.

330
 —Checking battery condition Battery recharging precautions
During recharging, the battery is pro-
NOTICE Type A ducing hydrogen gas.
Green Dark Clear or
z Be sure the engine and all accesso- Therefore, before recharging:
light yellow
ries are off before performing main-
1. If recharging with the battery installed
tenance.
on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect
z When checking the battery, remove the ground cable.
the ground cable from the negative Type B
2. Be sure the power switch on the re-
terminal (“–” mark) first and rein- Blue White Red charger is off when connecting the
stall it last.
charger cables to the battery and when
z Be careful not to cause a short cir- disconnecting them.
cuit with tools.
z Take care no solution gets into the CAUTION
battery when washing it.
CHECKING BY INDICATOR D Always charge the battery in an un-
If the battery terminal is disconnected Check the battery condition by the indi- confined area. Do not charge the
or the battery is run down, the moon cator color. battery in a garage or closed room
roof may not operate automatically and where there is not sufficient ventila-
the jam protection function will not operate Indicator color tion.
Condition
correctly after you reconnect, replace or Type A Type B D Only do a slow charge (5 A or
recharge the battery with the moon roof less). Charging at a quicker rate is
slide- opened or tilted up. In any of these Green Blue Good dangerous. The battery may ex-
cases, you should return the moon roof to Charging necessary. plode, causing personal injuries.
normal. To return the moon roof to normal, Have battery
see “Electric moon roof” on page 31. Dark White
checked by your
Toyota dealer. NOTICE

Clear or Have battery Never recharge the battery while the

light Red checked by your engine is running. Also, be sure all
yellow Toyota dealer. accessories are turned off.

331
Checking and replacing fuses
Type A fuses can be pulled out by the
pull- out tool. The location of the pull- out
tool is shown in the illustration.
Type A
If you are not sure whether the fuse has
blown, try replacing the suspected fuse
with one that you know is good.
If the fuse has blown, push a new fuse
into the clip.
Good Blown Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-
ing designated on the fuse box lid.
Type B If you do not have a spare fuse, in an
emergency you can pull out the “RADIO”,
“DOME” or “RR A.C” fuse, which may be
If the headlights or other electrical dispensable for normal driving, and use it
components do not work, check the if its amperage rating is the same.
fuses. If any of the fuses are blown,
they must be replaced. If you cannot use one of the same amper-
Good Blown age, use one that is lower, but as close
See “Fuse locations” on page 309 for to the rating as possible. If the amperage
locations of the fuses. is lower than that specified, the fuse
Type C
Turn the ignition switch and inoperative might blow out again but this does not
component off. Pull the suspected fuse indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get
straight out and check it. the correct fuse as soon as possible and
return the substitute to its original clip.
Determine which fuse may be causing the
problem. The lid of the fuse box shows It is a good idea to purchase a set of
the name of the circuit for each fuse. See spare fuses and keep them in your ve-
Good Blown page on 345 for the functions controlled hicle for emergencies.
by each circuit.

332
 Adding washer fluid Replacing light bulbs—
If the new fuse immediately blows out, If any washer does not work, the wash- The following illustrations show how to
there is a problem with the electrical sys- er tank may be empty. Add washer gain access to the bulbs. When replacing
tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it as fluid. a bulb, make sure the ignition switch and
soon as possible. You may use plain water as washer fluid. light switch are off. Use bulbs with the
However, in cold areas where tempera- wattage ratings given in the table.
CAUTION tures range below freezing point, use The tail lights and stop lights consist of
washer fluid containing antifreeze. This a number of LEDs. If any LED burns out,
Never use a fuse with a higher am- product is available at your Toyota dealer we recommend you take your vehicle to
perage rating, or any other object, in and most auto parts stores. Follow the your Toyota dealer to have the light in-
place of a fuse. This may cause ex- manufacturer’s directions for how much to spected as soon as possible.
tensive damage and possibly a fire. mix with water.
CAUTION
NOTICE
z Do not use engine antifreeze or any
D To prevent burning yourself, do not
replace the light bulbs while they
other substitute because it may
are hot.
damage your vehicle’s paint.
z Do not fill washer fluid over the
D Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and require special handling.
“NORMAL” level.
They can burst or shatter if
scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb
only by its plastic or metal case.
Do not touch the glass part of a
bulb with bare hands.

NOTICE
Only use a bulb of the listed type.

333
 —Headlights
The inside of the lens of exterior lights Bulb
such as headlights may temporarily fog up Light bulbs W Type
No.
when the lens becomes wet in the rain or Rear turn signal
in a car wash. This is not a problem 7440 21 D
lights
because the fogging is caused by the
temperature difference between the outside Back- up lights 921 18 D
and inside of the lens, just like the wind- 73c005a
Hight mounted
shield fogs up in the rain. However, if — 2.2 G
stoplight
there is a large drop of water on the
License plate lights — 5 D
inside of the lens, or if there is water
pooled inside the light, contact your Interior lights — 8 E
Toyota dealer.
Personal lights
Type A — 5 F
Light bulbs Bulb W Type
No. Type B — 8 E
1. Open the hood.
Headlights Glove box light — 1.4 D Left- hand headlight: Remove the
9005 60 A
(high) Door courtesy washer inlet.
— 3 D
Headlights lights Be careful not to spill the washer fluid
9006 51 B
(low) Vanity lights — 1.5 E over the “NORMAL” level.
Front turn signal, Do not place the washer inlet on the en-
front side marker 1157NA 27/8 C A : HB3 halogen bulbs gine or battery.
and parking lights B : HB4 halogen bulbs
Front fog lights 9006 51 B C : Single end bulbs (amber)
D : Wedge base bulbs
Tail lights — 0.5 G
E : Double end bulbs
4.3/ F : Single end bulbs
Stop/ tail lights — G
0.3 G : LEDs (Light- emitting Diodes)

334
2. Left- hand headlight and right- hand 3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb base. 4. Left- hand headlight and right- hand
head light (high beam): If the connector is tight, wiggle it. headlight (high beam):
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise Install the bulb base by turning it
to the front of the vehicle. clockwise to the front of the vehicle.
Right- hand headlight (low beam): Right- hand headlight (low beam):
Turn the bulb base clockwise to the Install the bulb base by turning it
front of the vehicle. counterclockwise to the front of the
vehicle.
Left- hand haedlight: Remove the
washer inlet.
Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-
essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

335
—Front fog lights

1. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise 2. Pull the bulb out of the bulb base. 3. Install a new bulb base by turning it
to the front of the vehicle as shown. If the connector is tight, wiggle it. clockwise to the front of the vehicle.
Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-
essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

336
—Front turn signal and front —Rear turn signal and back–
side marker lights up lights
If either the left or right front turn sig-
nal and front side marker light burns
out, contact your Toyota dealer. a
NOTICE
Do not try to replace the front turn b
signal and front side marker light
bulbs by your self. You may damage
the vehicle.

Use a flathead screwdriver. a: Rear turn signal light

b: Back–up light

337
—License plate lights

338
 SECTION 8
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions and weightss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Service specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

339
Dimensions and weights Engine Fuel
Overall length mm (in.) 4890 (192.5) Model: Fuel type:
Overall width mm (in.) 1940 (76.4) 4.7L V8 (2UZ- FE) Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or higher.
Overall height∗1 mm (in.) 1875 (73.8) Type:
For improved vehicle performance, the
1845 (72.6)∗2 8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline
use of premium unleaded gasoline with
Wheelbase mm (in.) 2850 (112.2) Bore and stroke, mm (in.): an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Oc-
94.0 84.0 (3.70 3.30) tane Number 96) or higher is recom-
Front tread mm (in.) 1620 (63.8)
Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.): mended.
Rear tread mm (in.) 1615 (63.6) 4664 (284.6) Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp.gal.):
Vehicle capacity weight 96 (25.4, 21.1)
(occupants + luggage)
kg (lb.) 545 (1200)
Towing capacity
(trailer weight + cargo weight)
kg (lb.) 2948 (6500)
∗1 : Unladen vehicle
∗2 : With active height control suspension

340
Service specifications
ENGINE Recommended viscosity: COOLING SYSTEM
Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.): SAE 5W- 30 Total capacity, L (qt., Imp.qt.)
Intake 0.15 – 0.25 (0.006 – 0.010) Without rear heater 14.7 (15.5, 12.9)
Exhaust 0.25 – 0.35 (0.010 – 0.014) With rear heater 15.4 (16.3, 13.6)
Spark plug type: Coolant type:
DENSO SK20R11 “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is used
NGK IFR6A11 in your Toyota vehicle at factory fill. In
Spark plug gap, mm (in.): order to avoid technical problems, only use
1.1 (0.043) “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar
ENGINE LUBRICATION high quality ethylene glycol based non- sili-
cate, non- amine, non- nitrite, and non- bo-
Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., rate coolant with long- life hybrid organic
Imp.qt.) Outside temperature
acid technology. (Coolant with long- life hy-
With filter 6.8 (7.2, 6.0) brid organic acid technology is a combina-
Without filter 6.4 (6.8, 5.6) tion of low phosphates and organic acids.)
Oil grade: Do not use plain water alone.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in ther details. Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-
your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota ap- ther details.
proved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent to satisfy the following grade BATTERY
and viscosity. Open voltage∗ at 20_C (68_F):
Oil grade: 12.6 – 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 – 12.4 V Half charged
API grade, SL “Energy- Conserving” or 11.8 – 12.0 V Discharged
ILSAC multigrade engine oil ∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af-
ter the key is removed with all the lights
turned off
Charging rates:
5 A max.

341
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION TRANSFER CHASSIS LUBRICATION
Fluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp.qt.) Wheel bearings:
Imp.qt.) 1.3 (1.4, 1.1) Lithium base wheel bearing grease,
Up to 3.0 (3.2, 2.6) NLGI No.2
Oil type:
Fluid type: Gear oil API GL- 4 or GL- 5 Front drive shaft thrust bushings:
“Toyota Genuine ATF WS” Synthetic oil and lithium soap base
Recommended oil viscosity:
Change automatic transmission fluid chassis grease, NLGI No.1
SAE 75W- 90
only as necessary.
DIFFERENTIAL Propeller shafts:
Generally, it is necessary to change au- Spiders
tomatic transmission fluid only if your Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp.qt.): Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI
vehicle is driven under one of the Spe- Front 1.6 (1.7, 1.4) No.2
cial Operating Conditions listed in your Rear 3.3 (3.5, 2.9) Slide yoke
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. When Oil type:
Hypoid gear oil API GL- 5 No.2 or Molybdenum—disulfide lithium
changing the automatic transmission
base chassis grease, NLGI No.2
fluid, use only “Toyota Genuine ATF Recommended oil viscosity:
WS” (ATF JWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid Above –18_C (0_F)
in assuring maximum transmission per- SAE 90
formance. Below –18_C (0_F)
Notice: Using automatic transmission SAE 80W or 80W- 90
fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF
WS” may cause deterioration in shift
quality, locking up of your transmis-
sion accompanied by vibration, and
ultimately damage the automatic
transmission of your vehicle.

342
BRAKES
Minimum pedal clearance when depressed
with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)
with the engine running, mm (in.):
116 (4.6)
Pedal free play, mm (in.):
1 – 6 (0.04 – 0.24)
Pad wear limit, mm (in.):
1.0 (0.04)
Lining wear limit, mm (in.):
1.0 (0.04)
Parking brake adjustment when pulled with
the force of 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf):
4 – 6 clicks
Fluid type:
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
STEERING
Wheel free play:
Less than 40 mm (1.6 in.)
Power steering fluid type:
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONRII
or III

343
Tires
Tire size and inflation pressure:
kPa (psi)
Front Rear
Tire size Wheel size
Normal driving Trailer towing Normal driving Trailer towing
P275/60R18 111H 200 (29) 220 (32) 220 (32) 240 (35) 18 8JJ
Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf): 131 (13.4, 96.6)
NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure”
on page 320 through “Aluminum wheel precautions” on page 328.

344
Fuses

Engine compartment Left side kick panel Right side kick panel

Fuses 8. HAZ- TRN 15 A: Emergency flashers, 18. BAT 30 A: All components in “ECU- B2”
1. ABS NO.2 40 A: Anti- lock brake sys- Turn signal lights 19. TEL 7.5 A: No circuit
tem 9. ALT- S 7.5 A: Charging system 20. AMP 30 A: Audio system
2. ABS NO.1 50 A: Anti- lock brake system 10. NV- IR 20 A: No circuit 21. EFI or ECD No.1 25 A: Multiport fuel
3. AHC 50 A: No circuit 11. FR FOG 15 A: Fog lights injection system/Sequential multiport fuel
4. WIP- S 7.5 A: No circuit 12. TOWING BRK 30A: Trailer lights injection system

5. TOWING 30 A: Trailer lights 13. HEAD CLNER 20 A: Headlight cleaner 22. AM2 15 A: All components in “IGN”

6. MIR HTR 15 A: Outside rear view mirror 14. FR- IG 10 A: Charging system 23. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-
defogger tem/Sequential multiport fuel injection sys-
15. PANEL 7.5 A: Instrument panel light tem
7. RR HTR 10 A: Rear air conditioning sys- 16. TOWING TAIL 30 A: Trailer lights
tem 24. HORN 10 A: Horns
17. TAIL 15 A: Parking lights, Tail lights 25. HEAD (RH- LWR) 10 A: Right- hand
headlight (low beam)

345
 34. AHC- B 15 A: Active height control sus- 52. DIFF 20 A: Four- wheel drive system
pension (AHC) 53. WASHER 15 A: Windshield washer
35. FUEL HTR 20 A: Fuel heater 54. RADIO 10 A: Audio system
36. POWER HTR 7.5 A: Power heater 55. DOME 10 A: Interior lights
37. AHC- IG 20 A: Active height control sus- 56. VGRS 40 A: Variable gear ratio steer-
81C506 pension (AHC)
38. EFI or ECD No.2 10 A: Emission con-
ing system
57. P/W (FL) 20 A: Power window
trol system
58. P/W (RL) 20 A: Power window
39. GAUGE1 10 A: Gauges and meters
59. WIPER 25 A: Windshield wiper
40. ECU- IG1 10 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/Sequential multiport fuel injec- 60. ECU- IG2 10 A: Rear air conditioning
tion system system
Engine compartment
41. ECU- B1 10 A: Navigation system 61. SEAT HTR 15 A: Seat heater
42. DBL LOCK 15 A: Double lock system 62. GAUGE2 10 A: Back- up lights
26. HEAD (LH- LWR) 10 A: Left- hand head-
light (low beam) 43. A/C 15 A: Air conditioning system 63. MET 7.5 A: Gauges and meters
27. HEAD (RH- UPR) 20 A: Right- hand 44. STOP 15 A: Stop lights 64. IGN 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-
headlight (high beam) tem/Sequential multiport fuel injection
45. OBD- 2 7.5 A: On- board diagnosis sys- system
28. HEAD (LH- UPR) 20 A: Left- hand head- tem
light (high beam) 65. SECURITY 7.5 A: Theft deterrent sys-
46. IDEL UP 7.5 A: Idle- up system tem
29. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets
47. LH SEAT 30 A: Power seat system 66. P/W (RR) 20 A: Power window
30. CIG 15 A: Cigarette lighter
48. DOOR 25 A: Power door lock system, 67. P/W (FR) 20 A: Power window
31. ACC 7.5 A: Instrument panel light Power windows
68. BATT CHARGE 30 A: Trailer charging
32. AM1 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injection sys- 49. SUN ROOF 25 A: Electronic moon roof system
tem/Sequential multiport fuel injection
50. RR WIPER 15 A: Rear wiper system 69. TIL&TEL 20 A: Tilt and telescopic
system
51. ECU- B2 10 A: Power door lock system, steering
33. DEFOG 20 A: Rear window defogger
Power window
346
70. RR A/C 30 A: Rear air conditioning
system
71. RH SEAT 30 A: Power seat system
72. AIR PUMP 50A: Multiport fuel injection
system/Sequential multiport fuel injec-
tion system
73. A/F HTR 15A: Multiport fuel injection
system/Sequential multiport fuel injec-
tion system

347
348
 SECTION 9
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.
OWNERS AND UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADING
Reporting safety defects for U.S. ownerss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

349
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has To contact NHTSA, you may either
a defect which could cause a crash call the Auto Safety Hotline toll- free
or could cause injury or death, you at 1- 800- 424- 9393 (or 366- 0123
should immediately inform the Na- in Washington, D.C. area) or write
tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad- to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of
ministration (NHTSA) in addition to Transportation, Washington, D.C.
notifying Toyota Motor Sales, 20590. You can also obtain other
U.S.A., Inc. (Toll- free: information about motor vehicle
1- 800- 331- 4331). safety from the Hotline.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety de-
fect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual prob-
lems between you, your dealer, or
Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

350